Home

User Manual - Music Cognition Lab

1. ccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees 121 HRV Analysis PUNCHOD esain o 121 THE TB CAG erre E A ao edsetaeaeettetnene 123 TBS TAROT ACHR CJC CUOMN irae E E 123 Prionns A HRV Gik TODOS essed vctce E E sa ead TEES 126 The Correlation Analysis function seeeesesssssseeersssssssseerrrsssssssseeressssssseeeeree 127 Session Overview Averaged Response Analysis NeXus 10 only 129 SOINE Scree TWO sioria E 132 5 1 Modifying object properties ssssseeecccsssssceceecccsssscceeccocssssssceeocossssseceeoessssss 133 Moyin and Sizine Screen ODJEC S moaienn ken E tcualualeceher 133 How tochange ODject Properties xii swsussteiissinedcuniniaalioretnentadiasiavdwceisiaeses 134 Properties The Color Property Dialog DOX cc cccccssseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeees 135 Overview Or Instrument properties enion a a 136 Instrument connecting a data channel ssssseeeesssssssseeerssssssssseerressssssseeeeeo 136 Thechannel NSE DOK ccoehesscstnnccnseenaaeouasoudladsewnaewautindabemdcancuesesedaudadawnarseutadateaneaneiecet 137 Connecting to multiple data Channels cc cceeccseccccccceceeeeseeecceeeeeeaaeseeseeeees 137 Properties Edit adata Coane ls cecatsntiwsavensdattaeecoeeatiiaten sneer a deeeedaheemniotveesadautawes 138 Properties Back ro nd amp Borders denac ech iar aaa ele 139 Properties Display Options amp Ranges 2 0 eeseseseccecccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeees 140 PHO periies TUe
2. A sample of the effect that this generates is shown in the picture below Instrument Style PolyGon filled w Display options 1 Refresh OFF nP Ges BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 177 Instruments the 3D FFT Spectrum The 7th object on the toolbar is the 3D FFT Spectrum This instrument is sometimes called a spectral Waterfall or Compressed Spectral Array In our first 2 channel neurofeedback system The BrainTracer that we introduced in 1992 we called this type of display a BrainScape when it was applied to the EKG signal You can think of the 3D FFT Spectrum as a spectral analysis over time where there are three axes 1 The Y axis showing the amplitude of the signal 2 The X axis showing the frequencies 3 The Z axis showing the progress of time A sample of this instrument analyzing EEG between 0 40Hz is shown below Spectral Analysis of EEG1 Another example of the same instrument showing a spectral analysis of the HR heart rate activity with a frequency range setting from O0 0 4 Hz is shown below Here Me a om a SPD iy i ppp AMMO ATH 1 aa a Hy Py a W h b jiii ai PI ii SS lt lt Hil WI Mii Wl a hy BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 178 Display options The same display options apply as those that are used in the Single FFT Instrument A samp
3. Note we advise to use a COM port setting in the range from COM3 COMS9 Important in case the NeXus does not connect to the computer it may have forgotten its pin code In that case you first need to pair the NeXus again before the BioTrace software can connect to it Solutions in case Bluetooth does not connect 1 Incase it has forgotten the pin code sometimes you need to restart the computer switch the NeXus on un pair it and then pair it before it will be detected This may happen if you have an older version of Windows XP without Service pack 2 2 Check which USB port you have put the Bluetooth dongle into Preferably always use the same port If you use another USB port it may reinstall the drivers for it and need pairing before it will work 3 When you manually connected the NeXus through pairing for the first time restarting the computer while it is connected and switched on may help to force the computer to store the right pin code BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 284 Bluetooth Answers to frequently asked questions Q1 Can I use multiple NeXus systems in a single location A1 Yes you can but we advise to keep the number below 6 units in a single room Q2 Does Bluetooth interfere with other devices A2 This is very unlikely The power it transmits is 100 to 1000 times less than a mobile phone Bluetooth has been developed by leading technology companies and has been th
4. OK Apply oo 3 3 Sessions When you record a session the raw sensor data is stored and in addition to that the event markers segments video files etc The computed data channels are not stored but always re computed on the fly The advantage of this is not only that it saves disk space but also that your data is not fixed You can change a data channel even while recording and immediately observe how the signal changes accordingly In fact a session is the collection of stored sensor data markers segments and optionally video or audio capture files The session files are stored in an individual subdirectory on your hard disk as compressed binary files which only the BioTrace can read and write to However in case you need direct access to the data in the sessions it is possible to export session data to other software applications for post processing When you export data it will be exported in an ASCII format 00000026 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help sack T T a pe Search gt Folders E Address D BioTraceVOo1 DiDatalooo00026 i Eco Morton antivirus E File and Folder Tasks SESSION SESSION 2 b Other Places b SESSION 3 SESSION 4 SESSIONS SESSION 7 SESSION 10 SESSION 11 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 49 Note you will only deal with sessions through the BioTrace software But you may make backups of the files located in the Bi
5. BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 98 Real time mode functions The real time mode also sometimes called the feedback mode is where you view and use all signals in near real time In other words when you recording a new session on your PC this 1s where you see the live signals This is also the screen mode that you use for generating audio visual biofeedback Now follows an overview of what you can do in the real time screen Functions 1 View live signals 2 Generate audio visual feedback 3 Change channel definitions on the fly 4 Show videos texts images 5 See real time signals at full sample rate speed 6 View frequency analysis and statistics online 7 Change scaling colors feedback settings etc 8 Use step by step protocols 9 Navigate to other screens 10 Enter markers during recording use the Enter key Restrictions 11 You can only see a part of the data up to 50 seconds 12 You can t use the offline special analysis functions So when you want to get an overview of larger parts of the session data or want to use the special analysis functions you should use the session overview mode Session overview mode functions This screen mode is used to see trends in the data do statistical analysis and perform special analysis functions such as HRV analysis The advantage is you can see the entire session at once or parts of it as you zoom in It
6. Button Action that would load and launch a protocol script Note Remember that a protocol script is always started by a button action The user has to click in a button to launch the script BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 241 7 0 Data Processing amp Analysis Functions BioTrace features a wide range of data processing and analysis functions for online and offline use You can use these functions to build data channels Categories of Data Processing The data processing functions of BioTrace are organized in 5 categories 1 Linear Algebra 2 Coherence and Correlation functions 3 Digital Filters 4 General Signal Processing 5 Frequency Analysis functions When you open the Channel Editor in order to enter a new data channel you always have to select the category of data processing before you enter the other properties An example where Linear Algebra is selected is shown below Editing channel 39 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name EMG1 EMG2 Sample rate for this channel a2 Samples per Sec Signal source 1 EMG1 arnpl Signal source 2 EMG2 4mopl Category of data processing Linear Algebra Type of computation Subtract source source Add source sourcez Subtract source sourced Multiply source source Divide source sourcez Average source sourcez 2 Subtract source source factor Default COLOR for this data channel This manual
7. Properties Title Text If you want to label an instrument you can enter a title text by right clicking the object and choosing title text Connect to data channel Edit data channel Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close The title of the object instrument will appear at the top BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 145 The following dialog box will appear actual screen display will vary Instrument TITLE text settings Enter object titles Theta amolitude muki channel only A Alpha amplitude multi channel only ASMA amplitude muti channel ony Load default channel name s Justify tithe text Text CENTERED Title FONT Arial 14 The example shown above is from a line graph displaying 3 multi channels You can enter your own choice of text in the text fields or you can press Load default channel name s which will fill in the title texts by using the channel names 01 14 07 16 Uh i 0720 01 222 07 30 07 32 Next you can choose 1 The text justification left justify centered or right 2 The characteristics of the FONT When you click on the Tithe FONT button a standard windows FONT selector box will appear where you can enter the font the size and font style Please note that you select a title text color through the object Co
8. Sensor BWYF Sensor H ASFP Sensorl Osimetn Spe 10 Sensor Osimety pulse 11 A EEG1 ravy q2 B EEG 2 raw 13 A Theta Wave 14 A Alpha wave 15 ASMA Wave TE 4A Beta Waves 1 A Gamma Wave 16 B Theta Wave 19 6 Alpha Wave 20 B SMA Wave 21 B Beta Wave fe EB Garnmna wave 23 A Theta amplitude 24 A Alpha amplitude 25 ASMA amplitude 26 4 Beta amplitude 7 a F m pei p i Select 1 data channel OK Ese Caneel This dialog box also shows the amount of data channels that have been selected at the bottom Certain instruments such as line graphs can display more than graph and therefore allow you to select more than 1 channel Sensors and virtual data channels The first 10 channels of this channel set for NeXus are used to channel the physiological data coming from the sensors These sensor channels can not be edited they are simply there The channels 11 80 are sometimes called virtual data channels The reason is that they process compute data from the sensors and turn it into something else BioTrace computes all virtual data channels on the fly and only stores the raw data from the sensors Editing amp defining a data channel Let s take a look at a definition of a sensor channel BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 92 Editing channel 3 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name Sample rate for this channel 2048 Samples per Sec
9. Supported Versions of Windows Windows 7 32 bit and 64 bit Recommended Windows Vista may work but is not recommended Windows XP SP2 May be used as an alternative to Windows 7 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 8 Minimum requirements for your PC 2 GHz AMD or Intel processor dual or multi core recommended GB of system memory XP 2 GB Windows 7 100 Gigabyte of free space on your hard disk for physiological data 16 bit soundcard or integrated sound Creative Labs recommended 1 free USB connection on your computer for Bluetooth communication Graphics card with at least XGA 1024x768 resolution or better Dual monitor setup highly recommended ATI or NVIDIA graphics card highly recommended 17 Inch CRT or LCD monitor CD or DVD drive An example of an optimum Computer for running BioTrace Windows 7 32 or 64 bit Basic features such as USB connections CD and DVD drives Dual or multi core Intel AMD processor running at 2 4 Ghz or faster 4 GB of system memory 250 GB free hard disk space with an external drive for backups NVIDIA or AMD graphic card with dual monitor capability Two 24 Inch LCD LED monitors xx One primary monitor for yourself and the secondary monitor for your clients Remark as an alternative you could use a 24 Inch monitor for your primary screen and use a beamer LCD projector for your secondary client scr
10. jpg T sunset0042 ipq T sunset005s8 jpa T sunset0074 jpa L Te sunset0011 jpg T sunset002 7 jpg T sunset0043 jpg T sunset0059 jpq gt sunset00 75 jpg Make a new folder T sunset00 12 jpg TW sunset0028 jpg T sunset00 4 ipa T sunset0060 jpg T sunset0d 76 jpg Publish this folder bn T sunset00 13 jpg gt sunset0029 jpg T sunset0045 jpg T sunset0061 jpq T sunset0077 jpa pg pg pg hiy Print pictures a Copy all items to CD File and Folder Tasks the Web T sunset00 14 jpq gt sunsetoo3o j T sunset0046 jpq T sunset0062 jpa T sunset0d 78 jpg led Share this folder T sunset0015 jpg TE sunset0031 j T sunset0047 jpa T sunset0063 jpag T sunset0079 jpg T sunset00 16 jpg gt sunsetoo32 j T sunset0048 jpq T sunset0064 jpa T sunset00g0 jpa dcasdcaracdvardcardcdsacdvarical w ii So when you place your animation files in this directory BioTrace will be able to find and use them Right click the animation instrument and choose Select Animation Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Text s Close You will then be presented with another dialog box where you can select the animation that you have just added to BioTrace BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 196 5 5 Screen Objects Objects the Video Replay Object The 16th object on the toolbar is the Video Replay Object Lal Video This object
11. noise correction By default for an EEG based signal band pass filtered you could choose a 0 1 microvolt correction or choose to disable the zeroing BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 257 By clicking the enable and update button the software takes the mean noise level from the signal and subtracts that from the RMS That means that the total noise in that band will now be subtracted from the RMS The minimum microvolt RMS level will be 0 1 Zeroing EMG rms amplitudes System Noise levels in the EMG bands 10 500Hz are generally higher than in the EEG bands Any instrumentation amplifier will always generate some level of noise The greater the size of the frequency band 1s the greater the noise level will be If you want you can correct the EMG RMS levels for this noise This process is sometimes referred to as zeroing Example in case you want to measure the low levels of EMG activity on the frontalis during relaxation which are typically less than 2 microvolts RMS you may want to correct the RMS amplitude for the noise levels In that case you shorten all EMG electrodes plus minus and ground of the relevant input and choose the zeroing enable and update function This will obtain the average RMS noise level and subtract it from the RMS level being computed displayed Note that the raw EMG signals will never be affected and the RMS zeroing can always be undone Note A computed
12. 0 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 1 3333 5 3 1 6667 Source1 6 4 1 5 E Source2 7 4 1 75 A Result 8 5 1 6 9 5 1 8 Note a division by zero will not be allowed and will produce a ZERO result value Average The function Average sourcel source2 2 computes the mean of the signal values from sourcel and source2 and puts the results back in the resulting channel It repeats this function for each value in the array of data values that a signal holds Result n Sourcel n Source2 n 2 Example Source1 Source2 Result 0 1 0 5 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 5 4 3 3 5 5 3 4 Source 6 4 5 m Source2 7 4 55 Result 8 5 6 5 9 5 7 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 245 Subtraction with factor The function Subtract sourcel source2 factor computes the difference of the signal values from source and source2 times a factor X and puts the results back in the resulting channel It repeats this function for each value in the array of data values that a signal holds Result n Sourcel n Source2 n factor Example factor 2 Source1 Source2 Result 0 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 4 3 2 f 7 Source1 7 4 4 Source2 Resul 8 5 o esult 9 5 1 Please note that you can enter the factor number in the Channel Editor Box
13. 15 Sec Coeff of arablity 115 Sec Amplitude AM Sx2 62 oK o Apr Session MIM statistic Session Max statistic Session MEAN statistic Session STODEY statistic Session Coeff of Yarnablity Session Amplitude Al See 628 15 Sec Basic Statistics Session Basic Statistics Show the REWARD counter Instrument Style Press OK to close the dialog box BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 225 We will now finalize this screen by settings the screen background Right click anywhere on the screen canvas and select Set Background Colors Set Background Colors et Set Background Sound 0 Show Screen Notes N Rewards Close Choose some gradient colors and choose Gradient left to right or another gradient option Background amp Border options Select the background FILL option Gradient color Background color Border Style No border Drop shadow enabled Cancel Press OK to close the dialog box You should now have the complete screen on your monitor Set the threshold of the bargraph to 5 microvolt by left clicking in the bargraph around the scale number 5 0 EMG1 ampl Rewards O0 Then play the session by pressing the REPLAY button You should now hear a flute tone when the level is above threshold and see the reward counter increment when the level is below threshold for longe
14. 2004 2006 Page 138 Properties Background amp Borders Each screen object or instrument has background settings Right click the object and choose the following option Connect to data channel Edit data channel Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Texts Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close This will bring up the following dialog box Background amp Border options Select the background FILL option a Color fill Gradient color Background color Border Style Black border Drop shadow enabled Here you can define the background colors and fills of the object You can choose from 1 No background the instrument object will use the screen background and seem to be transparent 2 A solid color background 3 Several types of gradient fills The gradient uses the Color fill and the Gradient color to generate the gradient 4 A number of instrument textures These are basically images stored in the BioTrace Textures directory Border and shadow options The border style will create a rectangle border in several available colors around the instrument object Choose No Border to switch this option off The Drop shadow option will draw a shadow below the object These are simply visual effects that enhance the visual quality of the objects BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 139 Properties
15. BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 129 1 2 3 4 5 6 The first parameter 1s the channel that contains the physiological data you want to run through the averager Next you need to indicate what type of epochs you want to average An epoch in this case means a fixed array of data samples that you will average You can choose from a Event Markers b 1 2 or 3 types of segments Merging them means that for each type of segment a separate line graph will be plotted Then you need to enter the 1 2 or 3 types of segments Next is the fixed size of the epochs that must be averaged Note that the only the start of a segment or event marker is used You must specify the size here You can choose from 1 2 4 8 16 and 32 seconds Last you enter what type of data is averaged Default you just take the data samples themselves The other option is that you average the spectrum of the epochs rather than the plain data itself For SCP averaged responses you will want to set the inversed polarity where negative values are plotted up this is a EEG SCP convention In this example we have chosen to compute an averaged response on the DC EEG used during SCP training on the training segments marked as Positive and Negative One of the goals during SCP training is to cause positive and negative DC shifts in the cortical potentials The sample picture below shows these shifts Now we press the butto
16. Display Options amp Ranges Right click an instrument and choose the following option from the drop down menu Connect to data channel Edit data channel Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings Close This will bring up the following dialog box Display Options and Range Settings f scale RANGE nn Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment Auto FIT to MIN MAH Auto FIT to O bMad Hes by eh lle fos antec oo OLEM ICA malian ange FFT Frequency range FFT Epoch size Show FFT statistics Smoothing Data Type Stats Instrument Style Display options 1 Display options 2 The first part of this dialog box contains the ranges fields where you can enter the start and the end of the Y scale range On a bargraph the start value would be at the bottom and the end value would be shown at the top of the barograph s Y scale Note the display options vary considerably from instrument to instrument Some instruments support frequency range settings as well as shown above An example of this is the Single FFT Spectrum object BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 140 Now follows an overview of all the available display options Y Scale range Here you enter the start and end of the Y scale range of an instrument In cases where an instrument always has a start value of 0 the field will not be editable Range
17. I on your keyboard After a session has been stored you take the flash card out of the NeXus and place it in a flashcard reader Windows will then assign a drive letter to the card and you access the card as if it were a normal hard disk When you choose the Import Flash Session button a dialog box will open up where you can choose which flash session you want to import to the PC Importing in this case means copying and decoding the files to the data directory so that BioTrace can read it A flash session is also called an Ambulatory Session Import an ambulatory session from FLASH memory Select a FLASH session here Select Drive Flash Session 02 04 05 16 21 54 00 00 54 H 00000000 SMP Flash Session 02 04 05 22 52 49 00 00 33 H 00000001 5MP Flash Session 07 05 05 15 30 32 00 01 09 H 00000100 SMP Flash Session 13 04 05 12 33 49 00 00 21 H 00000002 SMP Flash Session 24 05 05 14 04 19 00 00 21 H 00000200 5MP Delete Selected In the example shown above the flash card was found under drive letter H The list of sessions on the left display the date the time and duration of each session and the flash file name ending with SMP You may select one or more flash sessions and then select IMPORT selected Session s to actually import them into the data directory of the BioTrace When you choose Delete Selected you will permanently delete the ambulatory sessions from the flash card Th
18. Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 240 If you click this button you will open up a screen where a list of buttons appears Each button can be assigned to open your own protocol script or navigate to other screens You can right click these buttons and change the text the button actions and the help text that appears when the mouse moves over the button m Ca 4 F a arai ad Ei E bio race Software for NeXus 10 rccreen lt Other Protocols screen gt Client lt gt K Fie Screen Configuration Help Your Own Biofeedback Protocols Your Protocol 1 This is Help Text that you enter so the user knows what this button wil do Enter your own text in here by right clicking the button and selecting ENTER HELP TEXT Then Right Cick the button and select a Button Action that wil start your protocol Your Protocol 2 Your Protocol 3 Your Protocol 4 Your Protocol 5 Back to MAIN menu Your Protocol 6 Back to Protocols After you made these changes and linked you buttons to your protocols you save the screen File Save Screen Try to experiment on the first button labeled Your Protocol 1 and link it to another screen by choosing Hyperlink to screen Test Protocol si frst test protocol Click here to start Background amp Borders Enter Text Enter HELP text Font Settings Your Protocol 2 Button Image Button Action Your Protocol 3 Close From the same submenu you can select a
19. STOP Session when the script has ended BI M b MH ee m 16 Migraine 11 Finished scr Secondary 3 sec lt none gt Delete Clear Script Add new SCREEN to sequence With the buttons at the bottom you can add and delete screens to the sequence When you double click on one of the screens in this list you can view its properties Enter the SCREEN TRIAL settings Select TRIAL screen Load into the Secondary Screen if dual monitor can be found see Use text line to generate MARKER _ Use as prompt instruction in first text object Start screen in PAUSE mode Duration Generate segment Text line In this case you can see that Screen 8 is displayed for 180 seconds as a secondary screen on your secondary monitor and it will generate a segment of the type Train while this screen is running This segment will last until another screen creates another segment BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 238 The options of the screens in a sequence You can set the following options here 1 whether it is displayed in the primary or secondary screen 2 How long duration the screen will be displayed 3 What segment it will create segments starts immediately after screen is loaded 4 What text line you want to have appear in a text object or marker 5 Whether or not you also want to generate a marker using the text of point 4 6 Whether this screen should b
20. The 10th object on the toolbar is the Clock Counter Instrument This instrument can be used to feed back very small increments or decrements of physiological signals Examples are Skin Temperature Skin Conductance and EMG amplitude levels The step size of the increment decrement can be defined from very small 0 0001 to large 1000 by clicking the and buttons in the middle An example of the clock instrument feeding back very small temperature changes of 1 thousandth of a degree Fahrenheit is shown below File Screen Configuration Help Skin Temperature Clock Highly Sensitive Skin Temperature Biofeedback Menu STOP REBT NI Record ooo KTT C Every time the pointer advances one tick the Above Threshold feedback sound is played When stepping backwards the Below Threshold feedback sound is played You can edit these changes by right clicking the instrument and choosing Feedback Options and Thresholds Below a sample of the ABOVE feedback is shown ABOVE Threshold Midi Tone feedback s Required TIME above 9 milliseconds TIP you can use higher smoothing factors to dampen the response of the instrument put the mouse over the instrument and press S or shift S BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 182 Instruments the Water Effect Instrument The 11th object on the toolbar is the Water Effect Instrument
21. The purpose of this function is for instance for on line artifact reduction where a percentage of another signal for instance the ECG or EOG is subtracted from another source signal for instance the EEG or raw EMG The factor has to be set manually If an DC EEG is for instance contained with 10 eye activity the factor EOG that should be subtracted should be set to 0 1 equals 10 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 246 7 2 Digital Filters When you choose Digital Filters you can choose from several of types of digital filters Editing channel 17 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name 4 Gamma Wave Sample rate for this channel 256 Samples per Sec Signal source 1 Signal source 2 Category of data processing Type of computation IA Bandpass filter Subtype or Parameter FIR Bandpass filter l FHR Lowpass filter Order of filter FIR Highpass filter FIR Bandstop filter ITA Bandpass filter IA Lowpass filter ITA Highpass filter IA Bandstop filter DC Removal filter Type of UNIT to display Default COLOR for this data channel You will first have to decide what type of filter you want to apply Types of filters Band pass filter This is the most frequently used filter type It only passes the frequencies in a predefined band For example Beta frequencies in the EEG Low pass filter filters out high frequencies low frequencies are passed High pass filter filters out
22. YES the software will generate this data The last question you will be asked is whether you want to Save the generated session data Do you want to SAVE the recomputed session overview for this client V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 77 Again select the YES button After these steps the imported session can be accessed and used just like any native NeXus session Please do notice that the encoders used with the older software s do not offer the same high 24 bit resolution that NeXus offers so the signals may in some cases look a little noisier This may be particularly noticeable with signals like Skin Conductance Respiration and Skin Temperature BioGraph and the ProComp Infiniti encoders are registered Trademarks and products of Thought Technology BioGraph 16 bit was developed by the same company that has developed the new BioTrace software So by importing old sessions BioTrace is compatible with its predecessors Screens developed by BioGraph and MultiTrace can not be imported by BioTrace V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 78 Generating a Trend Report Open the database dialogbox O key on your keyboard and choose the client you want to generate the report for in this example John Sample has been selected Client and Session Database Enable Client Confidentiali
23. keyboards and mice only My device is set up and ready to be found Pr Add only Bluetooth devices that you trust In the Bluetooth Device Wizard you should now select the button My device 1s set up and ready to be found Switch the NeXus power to On The Bluetooth stick will probably flash a blue light now Then press then Next gt button Add Bluetooth Device Wizard Select the Bluetooth device that you want to add ij lf you don t see the device that you want to add make sure that it is turned on Follow the setup instructions that came with the device and then click Search Again seston ig After a while the NeXus should be detected Now select it with the left mouse button and click on the Next gt button Please note the serial number V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 18 We will now need to enter the PASSKEY also sometimes called the pin code of the NeXus This way Bluetooth protects you from other people that may otherwise connect to your NeXus Each NeXus is linked to a single computer and this computer will only connect to your NeXus if it has this passkey Add Bluetooth Device Wizard Do you need a passkey to add your device To answer this question refer to the Bluetooth section of the documentation that came with your device ff the documentation specifies a passkey use that one Choose a passkey for me Use the passkey found i
24. maintain range FFT Frequency range 0o 40 Hz FFT Epoch size 2 Sec 0 500 hz bin Show FFT statistics _ mean median dominant Smoothing Data Type Stats Instrument Style Pol on filled Display options 1 2D Style Defaut Display options 2 E how Magnitude 5 pectrum BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 175 Through the Display Options Dialog Box you can set the following options 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 The Y Scale range This can be any positive value It defines the height of the graphs being displayed The FFT Frequency range The maximum frequency you can enter here is half the sampling frequency so for EMG sampled at 2048 SPS you can enter values up to 1000 Hertz The Epoch Size of the FFT The Fast Fourier computes a spectrum on discrete portions of a signal These are called Epochs The maximum size of the Epoch in samples that the FFT can process is 2048 points That means that for a medium fast signal like EEG you can choose from an epoch size of 1 to 8 seconds 1 second 256 points 8 seconds 2048 points Show FFT Statistics you can enable the display of the numerical values of the mean median and dominant frequencies here Smoothing like most instruments you can set a smoothing factor on the FFT High smoothing factors will have the effect t
25. online for this function to work If you have no online connection you may also update BioTrace from a CD that your reseller can supply you Typically the files that will be updated are in the order of magnitude of 1 5 Mega bytes A slow internet connection therefore will in most cases still be sufficient You access the Live Update function under the Help menu found at the menu bar at the left top Fie Screen Configuration Show Instruction Videos Read the Software Manual 100 0 Show Keyboard Shortcuts K Internet Software Live Update Internet NeXus 10 user group Internet NeXus web pages 50 0 Notice that you can not run this update function when you are running a session When this function is activated it will close the BioTrace application and start a special update application Please follow the instructions of this update application actual screen display may vary m BioTrace Live Update Select an update option MW Download updated files only default Est Time 10m 20s Force download of all files Est Time 10m 20s After Live Update has contacted the Mind Media Internet Servers it will present you with some options 1 Download updated files only this will do the minimal update and only add or replace new system files to your system This is the default option 2 Force download of all files Only use this option when you want to refr
26. options Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment Auto FIT to MIM bl s Auto FIT to O MAS Auto CENTER maintain range Linegraph Refresh each sweep Using the Min Max auto range adjustment will take care that the range settings of both channels are made to fit the signals and thus both channels will remain visible BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 173 Instruments the Vernier Instrument The 4th object on the toolbar is the Vernier Instrument This instrument is rather similar to the bargraph except that it displays signals horizontally Below an example is shown where the Vernier Instrument displays the median frequency of a raw EMG signal in the range from O to 500 Hz EMG Median Frequenc 100 0 200 0 00 0 400 0 500 0 dih The Vernier instrument supports Biofeedback and most other display options BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 174 Instruments the Single FFT Spectrum The 5th object on the toolbar is the Single FFT Spectrum This instrument computes and displays a spectral analysis of any time sampled signal It is based on the fast Fourier transform FFT Below a sample is shown of a spectral analysis of an EEG signal using two different Instrument Styles ctrum of EEG1 with gradient Mean 13 4Hz Median 10 5Hz Dom 3 0Hz Y scale RANGE 500 Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment IT to RAIA Auto FIT to O MAx Suto CENTER
27. the time is displayed horizontally and the magnitude of the activity is shown by the intensity of a color The main use for the Spectrogram is to provide a visual overview of spectral activity over time Frequencies shown vertically Colors show magnitude of the Signal Spectral Analysis of EEG1 01 02 01 04 01 08 01 08 01 10 01 42 01 14 01 16 01 18 01 20 01 22 01 24 01 26 Time scale shown horizontally In the example above a Spectrogram of an EEG is shown between 0 40 Hz over 24 seconds of time In the beginning of the graph we can see some Alpha activity around 01 04 and low Theta activity which are both shown in the color red indicating a higher level Blue or dark colors indicate low level activity Red yellow and white colors indicate medium and higher levels Low level Medium Level High Level The Y Scale range of the magnitude being displayed can be changed by the range controls at the left top of the instrument Te F Under the Display Options amp Ranges you can also manually enter the Y scale range Frequency Range and FFT Epoch size Display Options and Range Settings scale RANGE Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment Auto FIT to MAA bl Auto FIT to D M Auto CENTER maintain range FFT Frequency range o i FFT Epoch size 2 Sec 0 500 hz bir a BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 181 Instruments the Clock Counter Instrument
28. we expect to see a positive correlation To obtain the estimate of correlation press the Apply button In this example a value appears that is 0 87 indicating high correlation between the HR and RSP signals If two signals correlate positively it means that they move in the same fashion So when one signal goes up or down the other goes up or down as well This is shown in sample A If signals correlate negatively their phases are inverted If one signal moves up the other moves down A high negative correlation See sample B can be just a meaningful as a high positive correlation If there is no correlation between two signals the result will be a value near zero See sample C BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 128 Session Overview Averaged Response Analysis NeXus 10 only This function computes an averaged response to a number of trials stimuli or tasks This technique is for instance used in computing evoked potentials resulting from stimuli It is also used for obtaining results from SCP slow cortical potential training The averaging technique will average out random effects and noise and will amplify reoccurring patterns All you need is a repeating task or stimulus which is time stamped by an event marker or by a segment area plus the physiological data which was sampled at the same time Using the averaged response function Load a session that contai
29. 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 70 4 5 The Client Session Database The quickest way to open the client session database dialog box is by pressing the O key on your keyboard Alternatively you can select it from the menu bar under File Client and Session Database Date Description me Duration Sensors Screen used 15 6 2004 Sample session with bw 2 48 2 00 05 21 EEG EMG EDR Screen 15 6 2004 2xEMG session pote Pees 00 02 24 EEG EMG EDR screen 23 6 2004 EEG 1 Channel 0 57 55 00 03 14 EEG EMG EDR Screen 26 10 2004 Video Capture Test BVP Shey 00 01 00 EEG EMS EDR Screen 8 3 2005 EKG HR Session 8 12 59 00 05 08 EEG RSP Respiration and 9 3 2005 2xEEG SCP Recording 6 30 04 00 00 15 EEG EEG EEG ScreensiEe Edit Client Information Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report Clinical Management LOAD session Delete Client Add Client Delete Session Import FLASH Session Import PC Session 1 Et Through this dialog box you access all the client and session data Let s begin with the client information Click on the button labeled Edit Client Information Edit Client Information When you press this button the client information dialog box is shown Client Information Use the fields below to enter biographical information cae Ate First Name City Gon Birth Date Zip Postal Code Grade 7 Sex Country meres d V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind M
30. 4 times per second The software generates a table of all the IBIs it found and uses this table to compute the HRV statistics The IBI table can be exported to other software BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 121 You can either select a segment of data or simply right click the overview screen and choose the HRV analysis function straight away This means the whole session is used After computing the statistics the following dialog box will be shown HRV Analysis amp Interbeat Interval Table Power Spectrum of IBI data units ms squared IBI Table ms HEY Time Domain Statistics in MS NNMin NNMax NNMean SDNN NNSO PNNSO 593 72 91406 713 13 77 62 65 20 63 HRY FFT Spectral Analysis results WLF LF HF LF HF 300 4 116583 0 775 3 15 1 Set Artifact Criteria Remove Artifacts Recompute table Export IBI Table The graph that you see above shows an estimation of the power spectrum of the de trended HR data using the IBI values ms as it s source The result therefore is in squared milliseconds The power spectrum is computed by a 1024 point FFT fast Fourier transforms on the IBI data which is time sampled at 4 SPS Below this graph you can find the standard HRV statistics In scientific HRV literature the interbeat interval IBI is called a normal to normal interval or NN value The IBI data used for generating the NN statistics has to be de artifacted before the
31. 64Hz DC at OHZ is not used BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 263 Band pass Power This function computes the power of a signal in the given band width band pass results in microvolts squared That means that when the FFT based band pass amplitude amplitude magnitude generates a result of 10 microvolts pk pk for the same bandwidth the band pass power would result in 100 microvolts squared In many research articles the results from the power spectrum are published in microvolts squared By using this option you can obtain data expressed in the same units Results expressed in power show the differences between the bins of the FFT more dramatically An example of spectral analysis on 2 seconds of EEG data is shown below in both magnitude and power Magnitude Spectrum Mean 17 SHz Median 12 0Hz Dom 10 5Hz 10 20 Power Spectrum Mean 11 6Hz Median 10 0Hz Dom 10 5Hz 10 20 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 264 Median Frequency This function computes the median frequency of a signal in the provided frequency band The use of the shift in the median frequency of the surface EMG power spectrum is a well known method of assessing muscle fatigue An example is shown below where the median frequency of a raw EMG signal sampled at 2048 SPS is computed between 10 and 500Hz Channel name Sample rate for this channel 32 Samples per Sec signal
32. Adjustments There are 2 types of range adjustments manual and automatic The first option is the manual adjustment You can choose Manual Adjustment which means that you have to enter or change the range manually and it will not be changed by the instrument The other options are auto ranging adjustments the instrument will auto adjust the range as needed Auto Fit to MIN MAX will enable the instrument to adjust the scaling while running signals In this case it will make sure the entire signal will fit inside the range from its lowest Min level to it highest level Max The instrument will update its Y scale range every time a new minimum or maximum value is detected This type of auto ranging can be used for most signals but are especially suitable for Line graphs displaying Respiration BVP HR Temperature and Skin Conductance Skin Conductance 00 40 00 42 00 44 00 46 00 48 00 50 00 52 00 54 00 56 00 58 ot 01 02 01 04 Example the picture above shows a line graph displaying skin conductance with Auto Fit to MIN MAX enabled This will ensure the signal will always fit in the y scale range and therefore will always remain visible Auto Fit to 0 MAX this option is very similar to the MIN MAX except that the MIN level at the bottom of the Y scale will always be zero This type of auto ranging is more suitable for signals like EMG and EEG amplitudes See the example below
33. Bluetooth Software Click Finish to exit the wizard BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 280 Now that the Bluetooth drivers are installed you need to pair the NeXus to your computer and enter a pin code You only need to go through this procedure once unless you connect your NeXus to other computers as well The first time you use your NeXus system the computer must be informed about the pin code of the NeXus The reason is that Bluetooth is a protected wireless protocol Not everybody should be allowed to simply connect to your NeXus and receive data from it Therefore you are requested to fill in the PIN CODE Please note the Bluetooth environment symbol color blue at the right bottom part of your computer screen Please double click on this symbol to open the Bluetooth network environment BA 228 em The My Bluetooth places window will now open Turn ON your NeXus and select the search for devices option as shown below This will search for your NeXus device so you can PAIR the device Pairing is a one time process whereby you connect and authorize the computer and the NeXus After pairing both know about each other and can freely connect My Bluetooth Places SEE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Search For Devices Advanced Configuration Bluetooth Help Topics go Bluetooth Exchange Folder Bluetooth Setup Wizard Bluetooth Tasks Norton 4ntivirus X My Blue Bl
34. Configure Flash Sessions InputI Oximetry 5p02 Input Oximetry pulse In the dialog box above the default sensor configuration for the NeXus 10 is shown You can configure the following 1 The type of sensor that being used at Inputs A J 2 The sample rate of the acquired signal 3 Which sensors are used for storage on a flash card Flash Session We advise you to only make changes in this dialog box if you have read the chapters in the advanced reference manual Also we advise you not to change the default channel set but to create your own channel set or modify a copy of the channel set Any change you make in the a sensor configuration or channel set will modify the way the physiological data is represented in all the screens that use this channel set in case that data channel set is saved So if you change the default channel set and save it most of the screens that came bundled with BioTrace will be affected V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 85 The default sensor configuration for the NeXus 4 looks like this Sensor Input and Samplerate configuration Select a SENSOR type for each input Samples per second Input C Input D Input E _ Unlock samplerates a Cance NeXus 10 selecting the type of sensor Each input allows for a certain number of types of sensors For NeXus 10 the first 4 inputs A B C and D can be used for fast DC and AC electrophysi
35. Note you can change properties of the objects instruments scales and screens by RIGHT CLICKING on them with your mouse Now choose the Color Settings item with the left mouse and click on it BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 134 The color property dialog box will appear Properties The Color Property Dialog box Instrument COLOR options Primary drawing color Secondary drawing color Gradient Fill Pattern Threshold 1 color Threshold 2 color Threshold color change Color of 4 and Scale Color of scale Grid Scale test color Tithe test color This dialog box contains all the color settings of the objects and instruments that are used to draw A The signals B The Thresholds C The Scales and Grids D The Texts with the instruments objects Please note that the background settings are selected by a separate menu item called background amp borders 1 Now click on the primary drawing color This is the color that the instrument uses to draw the signals in this case the foreground color by which the bargraph is drawn Let s change the color of the bargraph to green Basic colors a E ee Blue Add to Custom Colors BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 135 We will now activate a color change that will occur when the signal is getting too high over threshold Color change dd Threshold color chang
36. RMS amplitude will never be less than 0 1 microvolt This is the lower limit of the RMS levels computed by the software BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 258 Mean Amplitude The mean amplitude simply adds up all the sample values and divides the result by the number N of samples A EEG1 raw PELE PEPE A We 00 38 00 39 00 40 Mean Amplitude Note that the mean amplitude of an AC type of signal like the raw EEG will be close to zero and may even be negative See the picture above The mean amplitude function is however useful to compute the average data value over a certain time period such as in the case of slow cortical potentials SCP averaged Tw W a Yuna nt pn i tnai Y Mal Ni ll iili ETT ST LUA NAH 7 ed ees ae eee es ee ee eee SS ay FY aA 01 04 01 06 01 08 01 10 01 12 01 14 01 16 01 18 Mean SCP 11364 60 In this case the mean value of the SCP is computed by taking a 500 millisecond average 1 2 second of the average value of the DC EEG1 and DC EEG2 This mean value is computed 32 times per second signal source 1 SCP L RA 2 Signal source 2 Category of data processing General Signal Processing Type of computation Amplitude MEAN 32 SPS Subtype or Parameter epoch size 1 2 Second Note that the signal displayed above has a DC offset of about 11375 microvolts pk Dk BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2
37. Ranges Tite Text s Close In the dialog box you choose the Instrument you want to Link to In this case the Bargraph has been selected You can choose an instrument from the PRIMARY screen 1f you are editing a secondary screen Check the first checkmark button Next you select whether you want to link to a threshold or a range LINK to input from another instrument By LINKING to another instrument you can use its THRESHOLD or RANGE based state to drive an animation or show statistics l lt oensor E 2 Animation Instrument lt Warm your hands and make the sun rise _ This is a secondary screen get LINK from PRIMARY screen Link to THRESHOLD state Link to RANGE based state Cancel For mode 2 you select Link to Range based state In case you want to use the other mode mode 3 you select Link to Threshold state Mode 3 linking to a threshold When you link to a threshold of another instrument this will play the animation sequence forwards or backwards depending whether the signal of the linked instrument is above or below threshold In mode 3 there is no relationship anymore between where the signal is and the range of the instrument Let s now take a graphical example of mode 2 so you get an idea of how that works BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 194 Last Image frame N at the end of the range Temperature a 96 900 Frames 1 to N 1 in between The first
38. Secondary Screen Session Overview TAB The default grid settings are fine BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 133 How to change Object Properties Open the screen browser and choose the EMG screens category Now load the EMG 1 channel relaxation screen by double clicking on the preview thumbnail In order to be able to view session data with EMG press O on your keyboard and open the 2xEMG session from John Sample Client and Session Database C Enable Client Confidentiality C Use DATA directory on networked drive Date Description Time Duration 15 6 2004 Sample session with by 12 48 20 00 05 21 15 6 2004 2xEMG session 1240 54 00 02 24 23 6 2004 EEG 1 Channel 0 57 55 00 03 14 26 10 2004 Video Capture Test BVP 1 48 48 00 01 00 Please note that you select a session by selecting the data in the first column and then double click on the date While you do this the mouse pointer will show a pointing hand We will now make a change to the properties of the bargraph instrument in this case we will change the COLOR of the bargraph Now right click with your mouse on the bargraph and a drop down menu will appear Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color settinas Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close
39. Setup Wizard View My Bluetooth services H Search For devices in range g view or modify configuration Other Places Ej Desktop After a few seconds the following symbol will show T My Bluetooth Places Entire Bluetooth Neighborhood Nexus 10 0928040011 File Edit View Bluetooth Favorites Tools Help Back Bi a Search lear Folders Address E My Bluetooth FPlacesiEntire Bluetooth Neighborhood Nexus 10 0928040011 Service SPP slave on WexXus 10092780 Nok Connected Bluetooth Tasks j Discover services Other Places Ej Desktop 4 My Computer Dh Haak Cseh mnnm Caldas Now you can connect by hand Double click on the SPP Slave Icon to connect The following Dialog Box will show BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 283 Statue 2 Connecting SPP slave on Nesus 10 0928040011 When the system has connected it will show a dialog box as below eS The Bluetooth serial port COME ts now configured to connect to the device YS Neeus 10 0928040011 The Application that will use this connection must be configured to use COME The application may be started at any time Do not display this message again Usually a COM port of 4 5 or 6 is selected Please note that in case the COM port shown is higher then COM9 a problem may have occurred and you may need to manually set the COM port to a lower value through the Windows Device manager
40. Te ne Stress Protocol Short Rewards 0 4xEMG raw FFT Tutorial Description _ EMG Flower Animation Designed by Your Name em 4vEMG raw 4xEMG ms Medians 4xEMG m ims ie edian Freq EMG 1 channel relaxation v Rename Category Add New Category Load as Primary Screen Load as Secondary Screen Delete Screen E Click in the Save Screen button and fill in the name of your screen and your own name Since you designed it right That finishes the second screen building example BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 229 6 4 Example 3 building a Screen with Inhibits We will now build a screen that uses a number of inhibits Load the John Sample EEG 1 channel session We start from scratch Select the Build New Screen option from the main menu bar at the top Enter the screen name and select the screen category when asked by the software Place a bargraph on the screen as shown below Connect the bargraph to the Theta Beta ratio channel number 74 default channel set NEA ooreo ACK NTT I Then right click the bargraph and choose Display Options amp Ranges Data Type Stats Curent ACTUAL data value w Instrument Style Classical Bargraph Display options 1 3D Style Bargraph OO Classical Bargraph Display options 2 This will change the bargraph Style to the good old bargraph Set the Y Scale range to 0 10 Next right click the bar
41. The only parameter you can set is the size of the epoch used to compute the RMS amplitude As can be seen from the picture above a complete cycle of a wave is called the period of the wave We advise to set the epoch size of the RMS function such that at least one complete cycle of the slowest wave in a frequency band is available to compute the RMS Taking less than 1 cycle would result in an oscillating result Take a look at the example of the SMR amplitude on the next page BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 255 Computation of the SMR amplitude Channel name ASMA amplitude Sample rate for this channel 32 Samples per Sec Signal source 1 AOMP Wave Signal source 2 Category of data processing General Signal Processing we Type of computation Amplitude AMS 32 SP5 Subtype or Parameter epoch size 1 8 Second Notice that the input or signal source of the amplitude always needs to be a wave The RMS amplitude of a flat line would always be zero In this case the SMR wave is used An example of an SMR wave and it s computed amplitude is shown below A SMR Wave L J E 10 0 0 0 10 0 ee O ee O O e O O O OO O O OO ONOS O OOS A O O O S O O O T 0120 01 214 01 22 01 23 Note that the amplitude shown here is in microvolts pk pk BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 256 Correcting noise RMS Zeroing Any RMS amplitude derived from a bio potential signa
42. Theta Amplitude And so on You can see there are many possibilities More of this is described in the advanced reference manual In the screen on the next page this principle is displayed visually A Raw EEG A Alpha wave A Alpha amplitude 01 40 44 01 48 01 50 At the top of the screen you see the raw EEG filtered in the AC from 2 45Hz the original source is the DC 800Hz signal acquired from Sensor A The second line graph shows the Alpha Wave which is the derived from the same Sensor A but now filtered in the range from 8 12 Hz The third line graph shows the Alpha Amplitude Please note the difference between the WAVE and the AMPLITUDE The Amplitude is derived from the Alpha Wave by computing an RMS value the surface below the Alpha Wave 32 times per second over a size of 1 8 of a second V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 48 Editing channel 24 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name Sample rate for this channel Signal source 1 Alpha wave l Signal source 2 l Category of data processing General Signal Processing Type of computation Amplitude AMS 32 SPS subtype or Parameter epoch size 1 6 Second Corect Noise AMS Zeroing Type of UNIT to display Default COLOR for this data channel
43. Thumbnail will load the screen Basic Screens 7 tl PE m EEG Client Screens F EEG Master Screens EEG Screens Favorite Screens Migraine and Headache TE a _ ao T Multi M odality Screens 1xEMG training with FB increase levels xEMG with Statistics 2xEMG raw tms amplitude WAAC CPO MyScreens Respiration and HRV SCP Skin Conductance GSR Skin Temperature Stens Labs Biofeedback Stens Labs Neurofeedback Stress Protocol Long Stress Protocol Short 4xEMG raw 4xEMG ms Medians 4xEMG ms 4xMedian Freq EMG 1 channel relaxation v Rename Categor Add New Category Load as Primary Screen Load as Secondary Screen ave Screen Delete Screen e Screen Categories Before you select a screen you will first need to select a screen category These can be found in a list on the left side of the screen browser For your information the description of the screen category is used to create a subdirectory in the BioTrace directory with the same name So in this case you will find the contents of the EMG screens category in the directory BioTrace Screens EMG screens The button Rename Category will change the name of a selected category We advise to use this function carefully If a protocol has been designed that uses screens from a specific category renaming may have the effect that the protocol can t find the screens For that reason we advise you not to rena
44. VOX oe EO e aun aet 145 Properties Font Set 8 spin ers aderete rehab betalel eh cesdeeale 147 Properties Feedback Options amp Thresholds cccccccsssssseecceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeees 148 Biofeedback Overview of all the Options cccccccccccccssseeseeeeceeeeeeaeeseeeeeeees 150 Biofeedback Threshold levels amp Auto thresholds 0 0 0 ccecccccccceeceeesseeeeeeeeees 153 Biofeedback Enabling Disabling it on an Instrument erent 154 Biofeedback Midi one TCDA Ke sors oeaesha cata cceecaiteanctven nnn Meoelasieniuaes 155 Biofeedback Midi Song feedback iviseisicsssaiadiaareteicatsaiadsiaviietgesvalediuatadedaadtodenses 156 Biofeedback CD Audio feedback 0 ee ceccccccccccccctsseennssssssssssesecececeeeceeenaaaeees 157 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 4 Biofeedback Increment Reward Counter c ccccceccececcececcsceccscecscecsescess 158 Biofeedback Digitized Sound and Music WAV MP32 ccccccccsssseeeeeeeeees 160 Disitized sound Volume Feedback enisnonoersonscn naeaieiiahtee a deeaiels 161 5 2 Modifying Screen Properties cccccccssssssssssscccccccssssssssssccccssccssssscsssccooees 163 NCEE DACK SrOUNG Color enage atte terete tetera he teeta ouiateel 163 Sereen DaCk STOUMC SOUNC wiasese siersicasalacvaleadidactanniekiereanaeiva EN 164 Screech SCTCEM NOIE Sere e ea a E E 165 5 3 Overview of Screen Objects and Instruments eesccccsooss
45. about 1 2 megabytes per minute So in other words it can be a real advantage to have a large hard disk Recommendations for data Storage 1 Get a large hard disk as a minimum we advise 80 Gigabyte 2 For the advanced user on a desktop computer 1f you want a really fast storage system you can use two hard disks in a RAID configuration This will double your storage capacity and make it faster as well 3 Get an external hard disk for backup purposes or a DVD writer Backup recommendations Hard disks like computers in general may work flawlessly for years and then one day they might not This means you could loose all your data in an instant If the data that you store with BioTrace is important to you we advise you to make backups Please note the BioTrace software does not make backups of your data You as the user are responsible for making backups We advise you to do this weekly or at least monthly Keep backups in separate physical locations All the client and session data that BioTrace stores is stored in a single directory This directory is called BioTrace Data See the picture below for a sample amp Biolrace File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back 7 7 D ps Search W Folders Hab Address D BioTrace Bluetooth i A File and Folder Tasks R mj Rename this folder D Move this Folder A Copy this Folder Z Publish this Folder to the Liieh BioTrace Manua
46. and press the Delete Key on your keyboard Using the Undo function Ctrl Z In case you make a mistake or delete the wrong object you can use the Undo function by pressing Ctrl Z on your keyboard There are 5 undo levels Loading and attaching a channel set When you want to use a specific channel set for your new screen you can do so by choosing Load Channel Set from the main menu bar Screen Configuration Help Build New Screen Save Screen Ctrl 5 Save Screen As Load a Screen CL Do you want to ATTACH this data channel set Open Session Database tO to the current screen Doing so will load the channel set automatically next time this T 5 i Save channel SE screen is loaded Load channel SET Prin Ctrl P Print Preview Frink Setup Export Session Data Exit After you select a channel set the software will ask you if you want to attach this channel set to the screen If you say YES it will attach this channel set and ask you to save the screen After the screen has been saved the attachment has been saved to So next time you load this screen this channel set will be automatically loaded BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 217 Note there is one exception here once you have started a recording the channel set you have loaded with the current or first screen of a sequence of screen will remain in place and can not change anymore If you think about it it makes
47. appears Digital Sound amp Song Feedback settings for WAV MP3 and WMA files List of Selected Media to play Available Media Files RAIN1 WAV Applause 1 wav Applause 2z way BIRDS 1 WAV Boing L waw FunnyCartoon wav FunnyMusic 1 wav FunnyMusic2 wav Funny Whistle wav Harp Lwav Harp2 wav Harps wav OCEAN WAV SiTressors wav Uhoh wav LAJIA Tm TAITA LET In this dialog box you can choose a number of sound music files form the list on the right and place them in the list on the left to play by using the and gt buttons BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 160 You may choose 1 sound file in the example shown this is RAINI WAYV or you may choose list of sound files that will be played one by one You can put your own WAV WMA or MP3 files in the BioTrace Audio directory so the software can use them Biolrace File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O Back gt wi Search Wey Folders Address C BioTrace Name Size Type File and Folder Tasks 2 C Animations Folder mi Rename this folder jm i x Bluetooth Folder oy Move this folder channels Folder E A Copy this folder J Data Folder amp 9 Publish this folder to Export Folder If you choose to play a single file you could choose to Loop the sound This is particularly useful if you want to use the sound for a background sound Rather than using a digital
48. below threshold Proportional feedback this option sets the response of the volume You could decide for instance to get the maximum level at the bottom and the minimum at the top of the bargraph In that case you would choose Inverse Proportional Fade Out Range this defines what volume level you reach when faded out This can be total silence 60 dB or a soft but still audible level 24 dB BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 162 5 2 Modifying Screen Properties Apart from the screen objects that you can edit and modify the screen itself also has a few properties To access these properties simply right click somewhere on the screen outside the objects Set Background Colors Set Background Sound Show Screen Notes N Close a From this menu you can edit the three screen properties 1 The background colors 2 The background sound 3 The screen notes Let s first look at the background colors option Screen background colors This option will open up the following dialog box Background amp Border options Select the background FILL option Color fill Gradient color Background color Border Style No border Drop shadow enabled OK Cancel In this dialog box you can choose the type of background solid fill gradient fill etc The border style and drop shadow are not used These settings ar
49. connect it to channel 76 EMG artifact by right clicking and choosing Connect to data channel 4 Theta Beta Power FS EMG Artfact Wave MW Fe EMG Artifact ff ECG HA ASP Coherence fe Undefined Channel fo Undefined Channel o0 Undefined Channel wt Select 1 data channel OK Edt Cance Press the R key to refresh the screen and wipe out any remaining overlapping texts BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 231 Now size the two bargraph and make them a bit smaller Decrease their height We will place a line graph instrument on the screen Object Toolbar Place the line graph at the top of the screen and connect it to the data channel 11 which is labeled A EEG1 raw Notice that perhaps two channels may now be selected Select channels lt Default channels gt Senzor Eka Sensor CEMO raw Sensor D E MG raw Sensor E SC GSR Sensor F T emp Sensor G bP Sensar H ASP Sensorl Osimeti 25 p02 Sensor Osimety pulse 12 B EEG 2 raw 4 a T lebke bare m The reason is that linegraphs can be connected to more than 1 channel In this case we do not want that So unselect the other channel and only select channel 11 The number of selected channels is shown at the bottom of the box Humber of channels selected 1 Close this dialog box by pressing OK The next step is that we will add a video animation to the screen Ch
50. display the mean median and dominant frequency as a numerical value You can enable this option here 50 0 Mean 9 2Hz Median 9 0Hz Dom 9 0Hz 40 0 The text will be placed in the left top of the FFT spectrum display Smoothing Smoothing is an option that will dampen a signal in case it is rapidly moving up and down Example in case you are feeding back EMG activity on a bargraph or line graph instrument the EMG level may appear too fast or jerky to train on Setting a smoothing factor greater than 0 0 means smoothing is off will slow down the signal by a type of averaging It 1s easier too observe trends in a smoothed signal than in an unsmoothed signal EMG Amplitude WCE PETEELTLTERTTTHAT AMET UAAT AR TTETTATLLTTR THAT TAL TTP THAT APT TAA TTPT TAIT THATCH HT 4 0 i a NE RAPALA FI UA a PA RAT a Aiha i Meal dhl Lae TD TL De Oad os dhua bdo hasta Aeniahaahahehdvnbbddt Us aidsO0AOOA apo Auaha Aab DDA Mh dunda ign aiddabidntde bd ihuad o A A E 00 26 00 238 00 30 00 32 00 34 00 36 00 38 00 40 00 42 00 44 00 46 00 48 00 50 2 0 a EMG Amplitude Smoothed k 4 mA SNL av PEARL TUTE 2 4 Es a s NF adt In the example above an EMG amplitude is shown that is not smoothed smoothing 0 and below it a graph with a smoothing factor of 8 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 143 Data Type Statistics A number of instru
51. does not display Physiological data but replays video files The video file can be used for instruction or for feedback purposes An Inhibit state can temporarily pause the video The video file is replayed in a window and will play only when the session is running in record or replay mode You can put up to 4 video objects in a screen When the session is not running or paused the video file will not play The video object has a number of properties that you can access by right clicking the video object Select Video file Background amp Borders v Pause VIDEO during INHIBIT Close The first option is Select Video File This option will show the dialog box where you can select the video file s that should be played Select VIDEO files Selected Video Available Video Files Rabbit 1 wmv Rabbit1 wmv g Rabbit wmv Loop first Video Randomize List Note that you can select more than 1 video file In that case the video files will be played one by one in a sequence BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 197 Another option is that you can Loop the first video file That implies that the first video in the selected list will immediately wind back to the beginning and start replaying when the video has ended Adding Video files to BioTrace On the internet there are thousands of video files available but since they usually are protected by some form of copyright or because they ar
52. een ey SPEELGOED E Properties i a Removable Disk SWF The resulting ZIP file will be called DATA ZIP and can be opened like any other directory However if there is a lot of data in it opening it may be slow and take several minutes BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 273 Restoring a backup The restoring process is nothing but simply copying back the contents of the data directory to the BioTrace main directory You only need to do this in case something bad happened to your data such as a hard disk failure In that case you will usually need to reinstall the BioTrace software and copy the data directory to the BioTrace directory overwriting the old data directory Other directories you may want to make a backup of are 1 The SCREENS subdirectory This contains all the screens and protocols If you have created or bought a number of screens or screen sets you may want to make backups of these as well 2 The CHANNELS subdirectory This contains the data channel definitions If you created you own data channel sets or made significant changes to the default channels sets you may want to back them up BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 274 8 5 LiveUpdate Updating BioTrace over the Internet BioTrace contains a Live Update function that will check via the Internet if a new version of Biotrace and the system files is available Your computer must be
53. file that has recorded 45 minutes of ocean waves you can now use a 1 minute sample and loop it If you choose list of files you can choose to play them in random order The Volume that you choose with the vertical slider will be applied to any of the sound files that will be played Digitized sound Volume Feedback This is a special option that uses fading in and out control on your sound files In this case the signal displayed in your instrument will control the fader Choose the lt Settings button at the bottom to open up the control dialog box Volume Feedback Control Settings Here you define how VOLUME feedback is controlled You can control the volume by basing it on the start end of the Y SCALE range of the instrument or by making it dependent on the level above below the threshold _ Volume fading in out defined by start end of Y scale range Enter of Scale range to use for volume control 10 Proportional feedback level goes up volume goes up _ Inverse Proportional level goes up volume goes down Fade out range 24 dB fade out sound still audible _ Fade out range 60 dB fade out to slience OK BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 161 In the example below a respiration signal is used with a digitized sound above threshold and volume feedback enabled You can choose from a number of options in the volume feedback control 1 Volume Fading in out de
54. from the Space Invaders Game are shown Define your GAME settings in here Connect your control to an instrument that drives the control Contral 1 B Shoot Instrument 2 SMR Control 2 V Speed of your ship 0 Slow lis Fas GEMT eMo Link gt Instrument 1 THETA Control 4 Instrument 2 SMR Control 3 Control 5 E The Boolean settings of a game controls starting with B respond to a signal being over threshold The Variable settings of a game starting with a V respond to the signal level of an instrument within the range of that instrument The entire scale range is taken as being 100 and the position of the signal within that scale is then a percentage between 0 100 In case of the space invader game you can change the speed of your laser ship by linking it to an instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 220 Biofeedback Options and Inhibits It is very important to understand these options before you start building screens that use biofeedback The main concepts are Digital Biofeedback Analog continuous feedback Inhibits Digital feedback is where an event sound music video color is switched ON or OFF depending on a level being over or below a threshold Example when the Beta level of the EEG is over a threshold a single tone is played Analog feedback is where sound or graphics continuously respond visually audibly to the stat
55. image frame at the start of the range Mode 2 In this example you see how the first image in the sequence is shown at the bottom of the bargraph range when the temperature is lower and the last image is shown when the temperature has reached the top of the bargraph Other settings In the Display Options of the Animation Instrument you can edit the following settings Instrument Style Play both ways al Paani Display options 2 1 frame 71 sec Instrument Style how the animation plays one way both way whether it cycles etc Cycling means that an animation will start all over again when it has reached the end Display Options 1 the direction of the sequence Does the Animation begin at the start or at the end of the sequence Display Options 2 when linked to a threshold you can set the speed frames sec of the animation at which it will play forward backward Adding your own animations to BioTrace BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 195 You can add your own animations to BioTrace The image format of an animation is either bmp or jpg The compressed JPG images are much smaller than the BMP images but take a little more time to load The BMP files are large but load fast because they are not compressed Files in an animation sequence always start with some alphanumerical characters followed by a number index In case of the sunset animation they are
56. is mainly used for offline analysis but it can be used during live recording as well Functions 1 Provides an overview of the entire session or parts zooming of it 2 Shows up to 64 channels on a single time line 3 Shows both raw data signals as well as statistical trends histograms 4 Allows you to define segments of data 5 Allows you to mark artifact areas 6 You can enter or edit markers 7 Performs fast statistical analysis 8 Performs special HRV correlation and averaging analysis 9 Export parts of the session to other data formats Restrictions 10 Can t be used for biofeedback and other real time mode functions BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 99 4 9 Real Time Screen Mode The real time screen mode is essentially the mode that you will use when you are observing live signals use audio visual feedback and replay old sessions The main elements of the screen are 1 The caption on top of the window with the main menu bar 2 The screen objects and instruments 3 The session control buttons and time slider Screen caption with menu bar HR Sensor E EDR GSR Sensor E EDR GSR 0 0 2 5 5 0 70 00 y N BVP amplitude Sensor F Temp Sensor F Temp J 96 90 97 00 137 62 E g Heartrate ik d b a od bi bad bd bd bad Wd bid ias ibi ak a ba ait e mM ee 9 a TT oe ITA nT i Respiration Blood Volume Pulse ja u n a FO e jas a n pa a na a Se ee a S e E A E S
57. is shown below Category of data processing Frequency Analysis FFT st Type of computation Bandpass Amplitude w Subtype or Parameter Sec Epoch 5 Hz Key Note the short cut key will increase or decrease the band pass settings in discrete steps of 0 25 0 5 Hertz steps Percent Power of Band pass This function computes the percentage of activity within a certain frequency band compared to the total power of the signal The total frequency range of a signal is limited by the sample rate of that signal BioTrace defines this as follows Total bandwidth sample rate 4 for EEG the total bandwidth would be 256 4 64 Hz for EMG sampled at 2048 this would be 2048 4 512 Hz for HR data re sampled at 4Hz this would be 4 4 1 Hz The example below shows the percent power of the LF low frequency range as used in HRV statistical analysis Editing channel 51 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name Sample rate for this channel Signal source 1 HR BYP Signal source 2 Category of data processing Frequency Analysis FFT Type of computation z Power of Bandpass Subtype or Parameter 32 Sec Epoch D04 to o16 Hz Key _ Type of UNIT to display Numerical value Default COLOR for this data channel OK Apply In case of the EEG taking percent power of Alpha 8 12Hz would compute the percentage of the power from 8 12Hz microvolts squared compared to the entire range of 1
58. key However when you are in the middle of recording a session you first need to stop and close the session before you can switch back to the main menu V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 23 2 3 Point and Click Protocols BioTrace offers two levels to operate the software The simplest way to use the software is through Point and Click Protocols These are preset protocols that are automated so the user can just start them and let BioTrace The other way is through the Screen Editor Level which will be addressed later on The advantage of automated protocols is that many come pre configured with the software and run automatically Protocols consist of a number of screens that you navigate through by pressing buttons and are self explanatory in most cases In some cases the buttons are hidden and the progress of screens occurs according to a logic that 1s programmed into the hidden buttons But all protocols are advanced through button actions Below you see an example of a number of protocols We will select the DEMO protocol Please click the SENSOR DEMOS button to move to the next screen V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 24 2 4 Demo Protocols BVP example You will now see a list of the DEMO protocols The demo protocols display signals from various sensors and use stored session data So there is no need to connect any sen
59. labeled Date Now double click this date to load it Another way of loading a session is by selecting the session turns blue then push the Load Session button and then press Exit After loading the session you can replay it or review it in the session overview screen V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 38 2 10 Summary of what you have learnt To summarize what you have learned so far 1 You have learned how to install the BioTrace software 2 You have learned how to connect the NeXus to the computer via the wireless Bluetooth link 3 You have learned how to operate the demo protocols and use the button controls 4 You have learned how to record a new session review and store it Of course these are just the basics but getting this far is a good start Now it is time for some theoretical background information on the key concepts that are used in the BioTrace software These cover the essential building blocks of the software and are explained in the next chapter Knowing these key concepts will enhance your understanding of the BioTrace software V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 39 3 0 Key concepts in BioTrace This chapter will introduce the five key concepts that the BioTrace is based on You need to understand these concepts if you want to use the more advanced features of BioTrace or want to create your own screens or channel s
60. level Right click the animation instrument and choose the Display Options and Ranges option BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 228 In the dialog box that will appear we will now need to choose the Direction Inversed settings l Data Type Stats Instrument Style Play both ways w Display options 1 Directior inversed Deni mr You can set other two display options as shown above Play both ways and a speed of 2 frames per second Click in the OK button now to close the dialog box Actually we are done now When you press the E key on your key to leave the screen editor mode You can save the screen Let s save it as a new screen Screen Configuration Help Build New Screen Save Screen Ctrl 5 Save Screen As This will open the screen browser window Screen browser SAVING the current screen as Select a screen CATEGORY Select a SCREEN from thumbnail image list below Double clicking on a Thumbnail will load the screen Basic Screens sarima amp EEG Client Screens 5 EEG Master Screens EEG Screens Favorite Screens Migraine and Headache wis Multi Modality Screens J i Ae ra 2xEMG raw tms amplitude MyScreens ees ee st Respiration and HRV SCP Skin Conductance GSR Skin Temperature Stens Labs Biofeedback Stens Labs Neurofeedback Stress Protocol Long
61. list of screens V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 43 Dual monitors Primary and secondary screens BioTrace has built in true dual monitor support This means that screens can be loaded individually on the primary or secondary monitor and function independently When you load a screen in the screen browser you can load them as primary or secondary When loading through a short cut function key you can hold the Ctrl key down to display a screen inside the secondary monitor Note you must connect a secondary monitor to your PC and enable the dual monitor support in Windows before this will work The last chapter in this manual describes how to do this An example of a dual screen configuration is shown below Primary Screen Secondary Screen In this example the primary screen displays the EEG signals statistics and a spectral analysis The secondary screen displays a biofeedback driven game Generally the primary screen will be used as a master screen clinician screen and the secondary screen will be used for the client Note BioTrace uses fast graphics DVD and DirectX technology In most cases Windows graphics and video take up more computer processing time when run on a secondary monitor In other words graphics and video run faster on the primary monitor This is one of the reasons we advise the use of a graphics accelerator If this poses a proble
62. low frequencies high frequencies are passed Band stop filter filters out only a narrow band of frequencies The rest is passed DC removal filter this is a simple trend removal filter much like a high pass filter but simpler It can be used to neutralize the DC offset of a signal such as in an ECG Digital filters are very flexible compared to the normal analog filters used in electronic equipment Whereas in hardware the filter usually is fixed in software we can define and change the filter almost any way we like So let s take a deeper look at these digital filters We will now provide you with some basic background information on filters frequency analysis waves and amplitudes Most of the information here is focused on their use for EEG signals BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 247 IIR and FIR filters IIR filters are somewhat comparable to the analog filters found in hardware FIR filters are more digital by nature IIR stands for Infinite Impulse Response because there is feedback in the filter and it takes a long time for the filter to reset to zero when an impulse a 1 is run through it FIR stands for Finite Impulse Response There is no feedback in the filter and after a certain fixed time the filter will reset to zero when an impulse a 1 is run through it Choosing digital filters always means you have to find the right trade off betw
63. make sure your Internet browser is closed and follow the directions macromedia SHOCKWAVE BioTrace uses DirectX hardware accelerated graphics and multi media It requires version 9 0 of DirectX or later You can use the quick start menu to Install Version 9 0 of DirectX You can skip this part of step 4 1f you have Windows XP with service pack 2 SP2 or a newer version of Windows XP Installing Microsoft R DirectX R Welcome to setup for DirectX The Directs setup wizard guides you through installation of Direct Runtime Components Please read the following license agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement ou must accept the agreement to continue the setup MICROSOFT Directs 9 0c SUPPLEMENTAL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICROSOFT SOFTWARE Supplemental EULA IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY These Microsoft Corporation Microsoft operating system components Including any online or electronic documentation OS Components are subject to the terms and conditions of 4 f accept the agreement C don t accept the agreement rea Please check I accept the agreement if you want to install this version of DirectX In case you have already installed a more recent version of DirectX don t worry this installer will warn you or you can select the cancel button When you install DirectX 9 keep on pressing the Next gt buttons until a dialog box appears that asks you to restar
64. mean It simply means that if you click the YES button in the dialog box above this screen will load this specific channel set each time you load this screen For instance if you create a channel set that contains your own new channels AND you have created a special new screen for it you do not want this screen to use the default channel set By Attaching your new channel set to it you permanently link them together After you have selected the YES button the computer will ask you one more time if you want to save this screen The channel set lt Default channels gt has been ATTACHED to the current PRIMARY screen Do you now want to SAVE the screen If you choose YES again the link has become permanent Changing channel sets during recording Please note there is one exception that you should know about During session recording you can not change channel sets So make sure that the screens you use during recording are all using the same channel set If you think about it you will see why it makes sense An example imagine that you have two channel sets One that contains 4 channels of EMG on inputs A B C and D and another one that uses these same sensor inputs for EEG and ECG When you record a new session BioTrace assumes that you know what you are doing In other words when you connect an ECG sensor to the chest it assumes you know that you can t record EEG data from it Now when you wou
65. of an EMG signal using 0 MAX auto ranging EMG Amplitude Ee ARSE HV eR ac ee ACARI PHILP HE PEP IA IP i TT anda ee eT eer er TT TTT TTT TITIAN TN AlN ddan LAUD DAM iii TGA 01 12 01 14 01 16 01 18 01 20 01 22 01 24 01 26 01 28 01 30 01 32 01 34 01 36 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 141 Auto CENTER this option keeps the manual range that you set for instance a total range of 0 5 degree of temperature and makes sure the signal will be displayed within this range When the signal is getting out of range the instrument will auto center the range Example if you set a manual range from 0 to 0 5 degrees Fahrenheit on a temperature instrument and the current temperature is 78 5 the range will start from 78 25 and end at 78 75 When the temperature changes and moves outside its range the auto center function will place it back in the middle and adjust the scale for instance by changing the range from 78 5 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit The size of the range will be maintained You have to enter a manual range first in manual adjustment and then click the AUTO center to keep this range Skin Temperature The example above shows a line graph signal with the Auto CENTER option enabled The range is set to 0 5 degrees Fahrenheit The size of this range will be maintained to 0 5 but the start of the range will adjust to wherever the signal requ
66. of interface ij Found New Hardware MSI USE Bluetooth Device Windows will then in most cases ask you 1f you want to connect to the Windows Update on internet to search for a new driver If that occurs simply select No not this time Then a dialog box will appear when you can select where the driver software 1s located Hardware Update Wizard This wizard helps you install software for MSI USB Bluetooth Device If your hardware came with an installation CD lt or floppy disk insert it now What do vou want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Select the option Install software automatically and make sure your setup CD is located in the drive Windows will then search for the drivers on the BioTrace setup CD In case Windows does not find the drivers you can also choose specific location and use the BlueTooth Drivers XP SP2 directory on your CD V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 17 Add Bluetooth Device Wizard Welcome to the Add Bluetooth Device Wizard Before proceeding refer to the Bluetooth section of the device documentation Then set up your device so that your computer can find it Turm it on Make tt discoverable visible Give it a name optional Fress the button on the bottom of the device
67. options are 1 2 3 4 5 6 Print the numerical tables only just the numbers in a table Print individual linegraphs every linegraph will display one statistic for one channel in a linegraph Print individual histograms every linegraph will display one statistic for one channel in a histogram Combine statistics in one linegraph Example all the Mean statistics of the 2 EMG channels are combined in one graph and all the Standard deviations are combined in another Combine the channels in one linegraph Statistics are combined in 1 graph Output the numerical table to a TAB separated ASCH file that you can read or import with a spreadsheet or word processor This option will prompt you to enter a file name for instance trend datal txt and choose the directory where the txt file will be saved By default it will be saved in the EXPORT directory of BioTrace V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 83 After you press the OK button a print preview will appear Below an example of the option 3 print individual histograms is shown BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt gt Client lt John Sample gt mex a BioTrace Physiological Data Statistics Report Version 1 0 Bio Trace Physiological Data Statistics Report Version 1 0 Concise Client and Session information Numerical table with session results Client John Sample ID 000026 Session 6 sessions with 2
68. screen The designer of the screen is responsible for adding this information Vasoconstriction BVP amplitude Press Escape to close this window Title Migraine Vasoconstriction Training Design MindMediaBV Blood Volume Pulse X Exit Mena SERA ooo TS TI When you are editing your own screens you can press the button labeled with Edit and enter your own text description The software will add some basic information regarding the inputs and session overview mode to the screen notes TEXT entry and settings Test alignment Inset all edges Multiline test contents This screen shows the BYP amplitude m a bargraph on the left and a circle oomer Instrument on the right When the bloodflow increases vasodilation the circle expands when the bloodflow decreases vasoconstriction the circle contracts Use FADE IN effect BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 165 5 3 Overview of Screen Objects and Instruments There are two ways to create a new screen 1 You modify an existing screen 2 You start from scratch The first method has the advantage that you could use a sample or template screen that contains preset backgrounds colors and instruments That screen could also already have been connected to the data channel set of your choice To edit a screen you first need to load a screen and a session For instance load the Basic Skin Conductance screen fr
69. screen on your hard drive see the example above and copy files or email them An example of how you can send a screen to somebody else through email is shown below EMG screens File Edit View Favorites Tools Help wi O Search ey Folders EMG Relaxation 1 screen T 1xEMG training with FB increase levels screen jpg EMG Relaxation Lscreen jpg 1xEMG with Statistics screen E eEmc Relaxation 2 screen File and Folder Tasks P Ade the selected Ta E TEMG Relaxation 2 screen jpg A Dipy the selected i aii en E EMmG Relaxation water ripples screen items r ia en jpa TE EMG Relaxation water ripples screen jpg Publish the selected i a l screen E EMG with Video Capture soreen items to the Web icici screen jpg TEMG with Video Capture screen jpg 6 E mail the selected 4 i Open With p ireen E Mijn EMG Lescreen items Teen jpg TS Mijn EMG Lscreen jpg Delete the selected i Scan with Norton AntiVirus a items i EY 0 22000 eve ital coc I Cut Compressed zipped Folder i Copy Ei Desktop create shortcut 5 i G Screens T create Shortcut amp Fileco nea wy beet 6 Shared Documents i Rename i My Documents ay rI OQ UE a i ry fo 2 My Network Places a we PCGPDVD_112 E oe Nera skle Minle fk Please note that each screen comprises of two files a screen file and a thumbnail image ending with screen jpg You need to copy or Email both files The receiver should then pl
70. screen shows the entire session markers and segments The Session overview can be shown during recording but will only show the data up to the point where it has been recorded In the session overview screen you compute statistics and observe changes and trends in your data The Configuration menu items eb Help Sensor Input configuration T Channel Set configuration TY System Settings MultiMedia DVD Control M RSP HRV Pacer Settings Sensor Input Config Brings up the sensor and sample rate configuration box You can also press the I key to activate this option Channel Set Configuration Choose this or press C to view and edit the channels System Settings Choose this menu to view and edit system settings V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 64 MultiMedia DVD Control In case you want to change the DVD chapter or tile that is currently playing you can do so here You can also press the M key to activate this option RSP HRV Pacer Settings This is where you can edit the Pacer settings The Help menu items Help Show Instruction Videos Read the Software Manual Show Keyboard Shortcuts K3 Internet Software Live Update Internet NeXus 10 user group Internet Nexus web pages Show what s new in Version 1 10 Show Instruction Videos This option will bring up a dialog box with a list of videos that contain 5 minute or longer presentation on
71. screens of BioTrace Supported types of audio visual feedback The currently supported audio feedback features are 1 MIDI tones and tone sequences 2 MIDI songs mid format 3 Digitized sound and music MP3 WAV and WMA file formats 4 Volume control on digitized sound 5 Audio CD feedback The currently support visual feedback features are 1 Animations series of BMP and JPG images 2 Flash Animations Macromedia Flash files S WF 3 Video AVI WMV MPG MPEG SWE and ASF file formats 4 DVD 5 DirectX special effects 6 Biofeedback driven computer games 7 All the graphic instruments bar graphs etc Positive and Negative Feedback amp Inhibit states When using feedback during a form of training or relaxation you have to choose whether you will use positive feedback or negative feedback Positive feedback usually means that a person is rewarded when a desired state or criterion has been reached The reward can be an audio or visual signal such as a musical sound or visual effect Example when a person s muscle tone during relaxation 1s lowered to a level below a certain threshold a soft synthesizer sound is played Negative feedback means that a person is warned when an undesirable state or criterion has been reached An example when the muscle tone EMG is too high and has reached a level above a certain threshold a high pitch bell sound 1s played Another form of negative fe
72. session 5 Pause the session during recording or replaying 6 Record a new session If you want to display a screen full screen and want to hide the control buttons you can use the following function from the main menu bar File ea 78 Configuration Help Edit Screen E Edit Sequence Script Q Grid d Show Full Screen F Show Hide Control Buttons Close Secondary Screen Session Overview TAB Show Hide Control Buttons will show or hide the session control buttons When the buttons are hidden and you save a screen next time you load this screen it will be Shown without the session controls BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 101 The time display amp indication of the inhibit state 00007000 The time display displays the current time of the point of the session where we are currently replaying recording data It shows hours minutes seconds and milliseconds Note the time display will show a dark red background when the session is recording or replaying data and one of the instruments is setting an inhibit state An inhibit state will temporary stop audio or video feedback You can use the time display to check whether inhibits are currently active The picture above shows the inhibit state by darkening the background of the time display The time slider and time Key controls K o A The time slider can be used during review mode only not while recording to scro
73. several options to you which you can choose from The first option is Compute Statistics BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 111 Computing Statistics on a segment Segment compute Statistics Segment add Segment Segment add Artifact area Segment TYPE definitions Analysis Functions Zoom SELECTED data Export SELECTED data Close This option will compute a number of basic statistics but only on the segment of the session that you selected highlighted These basic statistics are D Minimum lowest value found 2 Maximum peak value found 3 The mean average value of the data with the segment 4 The statistical Variance 5 The Standard Deviation StdDev 6 The Coefficient of variability StdDev divided by the mean 7 An estimation of the time above threshold value 1 8 An estimation of the time below threshold value 2 The following dialog box appears when the statistics have been computed Session Statistics Note you can copy paste the statistics below by selecting the text right clicking with the mouse and choosing Copy Session Overview Statistics over 150 Seconds of raw and computed data starting at t 60 Sec Min Max Mean Variance StdDev Coef gt TH1 lt TH 362 487 410 041 033 008 100 00 0 Sensor E SC GSR 97 19 9748 9738 001 O08 000 10000 0 Sensor F Temp 1557 83 1707 65 1614 95 245541 4955 0 03 3100 O Sensor H RSP 65 64 10106 85 01 7
74. significantly over time It shows a pattern where the HR increases and decreases over a period of about 10 seconds In this case abdominal breathing causes it The HR increases during inhalation and decreases during exhalation This effect is called respiratory sinus arrhythmia RSA which is a representation of heart rate variability due to respiration over time One of the functions of the BioTrace software is to analyze heart rate variability HRV Keep pressing the NEXT gt gt button to see the next screens V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 27 In this screen you see the heart rate HR signal combined with a spectral analysis of the HRV heart rate variability The HRY can be analyzed by spectral analysis which will start after 30 seconds of data have been recorded The HRY is shown on the right in the numerical instrument unit beats per minute HRV Spectral Analyses kom 0 to 0 4 He HRV beats per reraie 26 04 Ow a 4 Hearrate HR displayed over iene SEGRE Now you can see what the relationship between the respiration and the heart rate is In this case they are pretty synchronous Now press the Show Session Overview button for the next screen Delite TreceGencentW averiie Sereemm T screen 4 acreen Fe Grem Configuration Help Lil HEH Er a kigeni fro Replay i FH ira EF ETH ir HH Er rH I Li fc Lia rr F z Foi rai k V
75. slide show list Each slide is shown for a certain time C BioTrace RC1 Protocols Vasoconstriction1 script SCRIPT editor defines a fixed SEQUENCE of SCREENS A button object can launch this script which will then display the screens one by one like a slide show Up to 500 screens are allowed You can use scripts to build your own protocols Migraine and Headache Run this sequence for cycles entire sequence must be based on 1 category Trial Screen click below LMigraine6 baseline screen 2 Migraine voluntrary cont 3 Migraine Vasocontriction 4 Migraine9 Pause screen 5 Migraine Vasocontriction 6 Migraine9 Pause screen 7 Migraines Vasocontriction amp Migraine 10 Relaxation sc o Migraine Vasocontriction 10 Migraine Pause screen 11 Migraine Vasocontrictio 12 Migraine9 Pause screen 13 Migraine Vasocontrictio 14 Migraine voluntrary con 15 Migraine6 baseline screen Load Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Duration 180 sec 120 sec 180 sec 60 sec 180 sec 60 sec 180 sec 120 sec 180 sec 60 sec 180 sec 60 sec 180 sec 120 sec 180 sec Segment Baseline lt none gt Train Relax Train Relax Train Relax Train Relax Train Relax Train lt none gt Baseline
76. so we first have to tell the computer which drive we will use Make sure you have placed a CD in the correct drive before using this option You also want to make sure that no other application is currently using or playing this CD or BioTrace would not be able to access the CD As an alternative you can use the Digitized Sound Music biofeedback option which is more flexible and plays digital sound files in the WAV WMA and MP3 formats After you have selected the CD drive a list with available tracks will be shown By clicking in the and gt buttons you can now add or delete tracks from the list box The CD feedback works simply by playing the selected tracks one by one for as long as the feedback criterion is true In case you have selected the CD Audio feedback above threshold it will automatically pause playing when the signal reaches at state below threshold No matter what the feedback setting for below threshold is Please note only place the CD Audio feedback on one of the criteria Above In Between or Below You should not place CD Audio feedback on more than one criterion or on more than instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 157 Biofeedback Increment Reward Counter Selecting this option will increment the Reward Counter by 1 when the signal goes over or below threshold and there is no Inhibit from another instrument The purpose of the reward counte
77. that has been selected here is the artifact rejection Exclude reject data marked as ARTIFACT area When enabled BioTrace will skip the artifact areas when computing statistics Next you choose the button Generate Report gt gt to generate the report or press Cancel to return i Generate Report gt gt ancel Next BioTrace will analyze the selected sessions and display a list of segment types that are present in those sessions Trend Report Generator Select the SEGMENT TYPE you want to generate a TREND report for select 1 type 4 session s Baseline 4 session s Train 2 session s Positive feedback 2 session s Negative feedback V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 81 In the example shown there are 4 sessions with both Baseline and Train segments For the other segment types there are only 2 sessions available Now you should select the specific type you want to trend For instance you could select all the Train segments Note when the BioTrace software generates a new report it will load ALL the sessions you selected one by one and re compute all the channels and Statistics using the definitions in the current data channel set So that means that when you have just changed a data channel the new trend report will reflect that new setting For instance when you edit a data channel say the Theta Wave settings and
78. the Data Type Stats option and choose Show the REWARD counter Data Type Stats Show the REWARD counter Current ACTUAL data value 15 Sec MIN statistic 16 Sec Max statistic 16 Sec MEAN statistic 15 Sec STODEY statistic 16 Sec Coeff of Yanablity 415 Sec Amplitude AMS 2 52 Session WIN statistic Session WMAs statistic Session MEAN statistic Session STODEY statistic Session Coeff of Yartablity Session Arnplitude AMS s2 628 16 Sec Basic Statistics Session Basic Statistics Show the REWARD counter Instrument Style Display options 1 Display options 2 Now follow two more examples of how you could use a reward counter Example 1 a bargraph instrument is connected to EMG with an Increment Reward Counter above a threshold of 50 microvolt and a required time above of 500 ms The training consist of 10 cycles of 5 seconds of relaxation 5 seconds of contraction where the goal is to contract at levels above 50 microvolt At the end of the 10 cycles the reward counter shows a value of 40 You enter the value of the reward counter in the session notes See database functions One week later the same training is repeated and the reward counter shows 48 at the end of the session The reward counter can now be used as an indicator that the 2 training has been more successful than the 1 Example 2 during Theta inhibition training a reward counter i
79. the SC level increases In the example below skin conductance is combined with temperature V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 30 Notice how the scales of the line graphs are automatically adjusting to the values they display In this case you see a dual line graph instrument that can display two different signals each with their own Y scale This example displays a typical relaxation response skin conductance decreases over time while skin temperature increases 2 6 Session control buttons Now while the session is running actually re playing press the smaller PAUSE button at the left bottom xX Exit Menu STOP Replay It will now appear reddish while the session will no longer replay but stop in its tracks Now press the pause button again or press the replay button and the session will start replaying again Session control buttons these buttons control the way the session is running Now press the STOP button to stop the replay of this stored session The Exit button will exit the application The Menu button will return to the main menu Let s do our first session recording we will use the screen that is currently displayed V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 31 2 Your first session recording There are a few things to check before you start recording a session 1 Make sure the NeXus has fresh batterie
80. the button action of a button Background amp Borders Enter Text Enter HELP text Font Settings Button Image Button Action Hyperlink to screen Close Back tS Then you select the Launch a script option in the button action dialog box Select up to 4 button Actions O1 RECORD new Session 02 REPLAY Session 03 STOP Session 04 PAUSE Session 05 lt lt BACK screen in script 06 NEXT gt gt screen in script OF Hyperlink to Screen 08 Exit the Application 09 Show Session Overview Screen 10 Launch a SCRIPT sequence Next you need to enter the name of the script this button will launch Click to select SCRIPT to launch The script file itself is something that you will define in the sequence editor A short cut to open this 1s the Q key on your keyboard In the script you define a sequence of screens where each screen has a certain duration which defines how long the screen will be visible until the next screen is shown When a screen is displayed you can make it create markers or segments in your sessions On the next page you will see an example of a script in the script editor BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 237 The protocol SCRIPT editor This example actual screen display may vary shows a list of screens in the script editor also called a sequence where each screen has a duration and some actions to perform Think of it as your
81. the entire John Sample session showing 2 channels namely 1 Respiration the blue line 2 The heart rate red HR line derived from the BVP sensor The fact that this screen displays only 2 channels does not mean that the other signals do not exist Remember that we got 80 data channels but are currently only displaying 2 of them So let s add 1 more channel Adding channels to the overview screen Right click the overview screen and you will see a drop down menu Select Channels for Overview Event markers segment options d Analysis Functions d Recompute Session Overview Compute Statistics d Artifact Rejection Size of TIME axis Close BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 104 Now select the option Select Channels for Overview and another dialog box will appear Select channels lt Default channels gt 2 Sensor H ASP 9 Sensor l Osimety 25p0 10 Sensonl Osimetry pulse 17 4 EEG1 raw 12 B EEG raw 13 A Theta Wave 14 AAlpha wave 15 ASMA Wave 16 A Beta Waves 1r A Gamma Wave 18 6 Theta Wave 19 B Alpha Wave 20 B SMA Wave 21 B Beta Wave 22 B Gamma wave 23 A Theta amplitude 24 4 Alpha amplitude 25 ASMA amplitude 26 A Beta amplitude 2r A Gamma amplitude 20 B Theta amplitude 24 B Alpha amplitude 30 B SMA amplitude 31 B Beta amplitude 34 B Gamma amplitude a HR EVE v Humber of channels selected 2 Note that in this ca
82. this configuration into a new data channel set Finally inputs Land J are used for 10 SpO2 level relative oxygen saturation 11 SpO2 pulse waveform 12 The respiration PACER signal which will be stored in a session The SpO2 pulse is quite similar to the pulse waveform from the BVP sensor and can be used to detect HR heart rate as well NeXus 4 selecting the type of sensor For NeXus the first 4 inputs A B can be used for fast DC and AC electrophysiological signals in the frequency range from DC to about 500Hz The following modalities are supported Type Recommended Sample rate SPS 1 EEG 256 or 512 2 SCP same as EEG 3 ECG 256 1024 4 EMG 1024 or 1024 5 EOG 256 Please note since the NeXus has the pre amplifiers built in selecting a different type here is basically only a matter of changing the labeling of the sensor If you for instance connect the second input Input B to an ECG signal it is not critical for the signal that the sensor is still labeled as being EEG The signal of the sensor in that case will not be affected and be just as valid If you decide to change all inputs A B to EEG you could do so here In that case you would set the type of all sensors to EEG and set a sample rate of 256 or 512 samples per second For 2 channels of raw EMG you would change the type to EMG and set a high sample rate of 1024 or 1024 samples per second Channel Sets supporting EMG at hi
83. threshold 2 should be adapted so that the physiological signal will be N percent of the time above threshold Note this will always be an approximation manual adjustments may be still be required after the period of X minutes that you enter Example 1 you define an inhibit state of a Theta level above threshold and use the auto threshold function You set the Target percentage to 30 so the inhibit state will occur 30 of the time You set the duration to 5 minutes This will now mean that the first 5 minutes of the new session the auto threshold function will be active and attempt to modify the threshold level so that the Theta level will be mostly below threshold 70 of the time and sometimes 30 of the time above the threshold Effectively then after the 5 minutes about 30 of the time an inhibit state will be reached Example 2 you are doing relaxation training using EMG feedback In the first 2 minutes of a session you want to set a low threshold value which will be the goal to reach Below this threshold you will reward the relaxation level with digitized sound of flowing water Therefore you set the duration ON for first X minutes to 2 minutes and set a Target percentage to 50 On top of that you set a required time of 1000 ms so that the reward will only be played if the subject reaches the desired state for 1 second of time or longer BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 153 Biofeedback Enablin
84. will apply to the entire session If you select a segment and then choose the Analysis Functions the function will only apply to the selected segment Close The functions you can currently choose from are 1 HRV heart rate variability Analysis 2 Correlation Analysis 3 Averaged Response Analysis xx More functions will be added to future versions of BioTrace HRV Analysis Function This function can only be applied to sessions that contain HR heart rate data derived from a BVP sensor or an ECG signal electrocardiogram Background information the heart rate is computed by BioTrace by taking the peak to peak distances between beats also called the inter beat interval or IBI The software uses a function called pulse rate to compute this data The resulting HR values are usually expressed in beats per minute Another measure however that is commonly used by researchers is the inter beat interval which is expressed in milliseconds A HR of 60 beats per minute translates into an interbeat interval of 1000 ms The original pulse signal from BVP or ECG is sampled at a sample rate of 128 to 2048 samples second That means that the precision of the IBI interval ranges from about 8 128 SPS to 1 millisecond 2048 SPS For clinical use the BVP usually provides enough precision For research we advise to use the ECG signal In the session overview the IBI values are computed and sampled at a rate of
85. you used In case you are using a Notebook portable computer we advise you to use the short extender cable See picture below BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 278 When the Bluetooth USB stick has been detected the SETUP software will continue and show the following dialog box press NEXT Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps vou install software for MSI USB Bluetooth Device ic IF your hardware came with an installation CD 9 QES or floppy disk insert it now What do vou want the wizard to do Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Back Cancel BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 279 After pressing NEXT the setup process will continue and at the end show the following dialog box Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for MSI USB Bluetooth Device Click Finish to close the wizard x Mo Bluetooth device was detected Please make sure that vour Bluetooth device is plugged in properly and click OK to continue installation Click Cancel to continue installation without the Bluetooth device Cancel x TRS N InstallShield Wizard Completed a N hy e b a The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed MSI s a a
86. 0 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 59 Quick overview of the keyboard short cuts Escape key E key K Key Q key M Key O key L key R key N key F Key C key P key Enter Key Space bar Tab Key S key Will switch to the main menu Pressing Escape again will return to the currently loaded screen You can not use this function while you are recording a session Will switch to the WYSIWYG screen Editor You can use this key at any time Press it again to return to the normal mode Will show a list of all keyboard short cuts Double click on a shortcut item to active it Double clicking a function key will load the screen Hold Ctrl to load as secondary This will open the seQuence editor This is where you define a list of screens These screens will be shown one after the other with predefined durations like a slide show The Multi media control allows you to change multimedia content like a video or DVD on the fly Opens the client session database where you can review client data and stored session data Loads a screen through the screen browser Pick a category and select a primary or secondary screen Ctrl by double clicking Refreshes the screen in case anything needs to be redrawn Shows the screen NOTES Switches to and from Full screen mode Press twice to switch back and forth Shows
87. 006 Page 259 Pulse Rate functions BVP and EKG These functions are generally used to compute the heart rate from a BVP blood volume pulse signal or a ECG electrocardiogram signal Since the wave forms of the BVP and ECG are different you need to select the BVP and EKG pulse rate An example of the heart rate derived from the ECG is shown below Channel name Sample rate for this channel 32 Samples per Sec Signal source 1 Sensor B EEG w Signal source 2 Category of data processing General Signal Processing ye Type of computation Pulse rate ERG 32 5P5 w A sample EKG and derived heart rate is shown below Sensor B EEG HR EKG 80 85 Please note this ECG signal is displayed within the full bandwidth of DC to 100Hz and the signal happens to have an offset of about 14 mill volt BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 260 Respiration Rate Function This function is used to compute the respiration rate based on the input of the respiration sensor The example below shows a signal obtained from the abdominal area Sensor H RSP 800 0 775 0 750 0 01 14 01 16 01 18 01 20 01 22 01 24 01 26 01 28 01 30 01 32 01 34 01 36 01 38 Note A respiration rate of 6 would mean 6 inhalation exhalation cycles per minute or 10 seconds per cycle When this type of breathing would generate an RSA effect respiratory sinus arrhythmia a peak would probably
88. 06 00 08 00 10 00 42 00 14 00 16 00 18 00 20 00 22 00 24 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 170 Notice that you can set different colors and border styles on this instrument Also notice that the top line graph has a different time scale it displays roughly 3 seconds while the bottom instrument displays about 24 seconds Each instrument can be set to have its own colors time scales smoothing factor and display option properties BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 171 More examples of the Single Y Scale Line graph The line graph below shows an ECG signal sampled at 256 SPS Raw ECG Signal AEL 18000 0 17500 0 blest 16500 0 16000 0 a ae The line graph below shows a raw EMG signal sampled at 2048 samples per second the first part shows the EMG activity during relaxation the second part shows the EMG activity during a contraction The range is 200 to 200 microvolts pk pk Raw EMG signal Ba i alia The last line graph shows Respiration activity sampled at 32 samples per second Inhalation is Up and exhalation is Down Notice the different time scaling Respiration 00 04 00 06 00 08 00 70 00 42 00 14 00 16 00 18 00 20 Note that on the last line graph the width of the line graph was set to 3 and the grid size was set to medium You can edit these properties under Display Options amp Ranges when you right c
89. 06 Page 250 Quite often though in scientific research amplitude and ratios such as the ratio between theta and Beta are computed from the power spectrum of an FFT In that case it is important to know that these values are expressed in microvolts squared where the rms based amplitudes are expressed in microvolts What is the difference between microvolts pk pk and RMS When we observe a wave in this case a perfect sine wave we can see its period which defines the frequency and the height of the waves which defines the amplitude However what do we mean by height We can look at the vertical distance between the bottom of the wave and the top of the wave This is called the peak peak amplitude We can also look at the effective power of the signal This is the level where an AC signal delivers the same average power as a comparable DC signal This level is lower than the pk pk amplitude and is called the RMS root mean square amplitude Peak to Peak Amplitude Period of the wave po RMS Amplitude V V N Frequency F 1 T In EMG publications EMG amplitudes are generally expressed in microvolts rms In EEG the amplitudes are generally expressed in microvolts peak to peak pk pk or microvolts squared For more information we advise you to read the professional literature on this subject You may also find a lot of information about this topic on the internet BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 20
90. 06 Page 251 Displaying the Filter Frequency Response When we want to see the characteristics of a digital filter BioTrace can display the frequency response You can only compute a frequency response on a digitally filtered WAVE So the IIR filtered Alpha wave can be analyzed The Alpha amplitude which is derived from the wave has no frequency response When you open the channel editor for default channel set channel 14 you will see a definition of the Alpha Wave for instance Category of data processing Digital Filters Type of computations IIR Bandpass filter Subtype or Parameter Butterworth cascaded Order of filter Std order Show Frequency Response 8 00 to Now press the button Show Frequency Response 0 1 2 3456 7 amp D9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 233 24 Save Curve _ Magnitude Show Decibels dB Phase show delay MS This graph will show you the amplitude power of the signal at a given frequency shown horizontally at the bottom in this case between 0 24 Hz in the color blue The phase response will be shown in red and is expressed in degrees 180 to 180 From the graph you can see that at exactly 8 Hz the amplitude is already somewhat less than 100 1 0 in this case you can read it is about 80 0 8 Most
91. 1024 it would not be handy to plot an EEG sampled at 291 SPS over against another signal sampled at 173 SPS The last reason is that fast Fourier transformations fast spectral analysis works fastest on data that is organized in powers of two Use consistent sample rates Finally we advise you to use consistent sample rates For instance don t use one channel of EEG sampled at 256 SPS and another sampled at 512 SPS The reason is that when you compute data channels where you want to obtain ratios or differences for instance EEG2 EEG1 both channels should have the same sample rate Unlocking and changing Sensor Sample rates In order to protect you from any entering wrong or inconsistent sample rates you first need to unlock the sample rates Simply click inside the button and a check mark will appear _ Unlock samplerates At the same time the software will warn you with a message The samplerates of the sensor inputs will now be editable Please note that changing the samplerates may impact your existing data channel definitions I Because the data channel set may contain channels that use two other channels for their input for instance EMG1 and EMG2 you could enter an illegal sample rate here which would impact an existing channel that computes the ratio of EMG1 and EMG2 Setting sensor EMGI to a different sample rate as EMG2 will render that channel invalid Hence all channels that use this ratio chan
92. 11 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 10 gt Install Acrobat Reader required for documentation gt Read the software manual Acrobat PDF format gt Install Version 9 0c of Direct X for older computers only gt Install Adobe Macromedia Shockwave Player gt Watch a video instruction on how to install BioTrace for NeXus 10 gt Install the BioTrace Software on your Computer gt For the USA visit the Stens Corporation website gt Visit the NeXus Product webpages Piease note that some items may take some time to load BioTrace Mind Media 2004 2005 You can select the options shown here by pointing and clicking the mouse on the text options displayed above example shown for NeXus 10 A B D E F G The first option will install Acrobat Reader on your computer You need this to read the electronic versions of documents such as this manual on your computer In case you already have a version of Acrobat Reader you can skip this step The next option will open the PDF software manual for easy reference Direct X If you ever need to reinstall DirectX 9 you can choose this option In case you have Windows XP with SP2 or newer you can skip this option Install Shockwave Player BioTrace uses shockwave and flash technology to play animations and videos Please make sure you have installed these on your computer Video we advise you to look at this short
93. 171 847 O10 0 00 0 00 HR BVP 106 72 190 70 140 05 243 15 15 59 0 11 100 00 0 00 BVP amplitude 5 53 6 09 6 61 0 51 0 72 0 11 100 00 0 00 RSP Rate 0 00 of the data was rejected artifacts o I eee The text in this session statistics dialog box shows the basic statistics for each channel that appears on the session overview screen Of course the actual screen display in your case will different you will probably use different channels a different session and a different selection BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 112 Copying Pasting the statistic texts You can select the text in this dialog box by right clicking it and choosing Select AI or by simply left clicking on the text and the dragging the mouse The same fashion you select text in a word processor Then you right click and choose Copy or by pressing Ctrl C which is the Windows convention Then you choose Paste in your spread sheet or word processor or choose Ctrl V Artifact rejection At the bottom of the text you find a percentage which indicates how much percent of the data within the segment was found to be within an artifact segment Printing the statistics If you click in the Print button at the bottom of the Session Statistics box you will be presented with a preview of the graphs basic client information and the statistics BioTrace Physiological Report Version 0 99
94. 1s able to turn the tone feedback on the SMR instrument off Note it does not matter which screen the inhibit instruments are on In this example the inhibit instrument could for instance be on the primary screen and the SMR instrument could be on the secondary screen The inhibit state is indicated in the Time Display element in the real time screen Record The background of the time display normally is dark grey in case an inhibit state in reached by any of the instruments present the background will turn dark red This way you can always verify if biofeedback has been turned off paused because of an inhibit If you do not want an instrument to respond to the inhibit all then you can select the Ignore option Note the visual display of the physiological signal of the instrument will always continue an inhibit will only have an effect on the Feedback settings of an instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 151 Ignore Inhibit All State By putting a check mark in the Ignore Inhibit AIl field you tell the specific instrument that you are editing to ignore the all inhibits and just continue with generating the biofeedback activity An example is shown below Theta and Beta Inhibit set above threshold Alpha Instrument set to Ignore Inhibits Theta Inhibit Beta Inhibit SMR Feedback Alpha Feedback When one of the inhibit instrument
95. 2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 28 The Session overview will show you the same signals BVP HR and RSP but now over the entire session which in this case is about 5 minutes You can also zoom in and out of this data In this particular overview you can see how the heart rate varies between 70 and 90 beats per minute and how regular the abdominal breathing remains over the entire session At the top of the screen you will see the BVP signal but now compressed Still it is possible to observe how the vasoconstriction and vasodilation alternate and synchronize with the breathing Now press the TAB Key on the Keyboard to switch back to the former screen Note Pressing the TAB key switches back and forth between the real time screen and the session overview screen Press the TAB key a few times so you get the feel for it The real time screen is the place where you observe signals from the sensors in real time which is at the time when they are being recorded and used for monitoring or biofeedback The session overview screen is where you observe the signals over the entire session or the part that has been recorded so far In Session overview mode you can compute statistics see trends and define segments of data We will go into more detail later on Let s compute a simple statistic from the session overview click the right mouse button on the session overview screen and a pop
96. 259 Pulse Rate functions BVP and EKG ssnssessensenssessenssessesssnssessesssrssessesserseersee 260 Respirition Rate wl 10 615 0 0 ares re ne ne eR ne RD 261 7 4 Frequency Analysis Functions ccccccscscsccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssccccccssssseees 262 Band Pass Amp ude eria e a T TAN 262 Percent Power of Band passSwartsSinsiie a nanan Seeasss 263 Pand pass FPOWG ocos G 264 Median PreguenCy cornas A adn deanatr asa sdetcaanoess 265 Dominant Freque ney vet tase antitusinseataucensdubaounedactnedetusiadieddaadensdubasanedddiandstenseateetonaes 266 Meam ECCI CING Y caserna ta waster eseaseualia saves mee heada i 266 8 0 Advanced Computer Configuration ccccccscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssscssssees 267 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 6 8 1 Dual Monitor Functions and your Graphics Card ccccccccssssssssscccooees 267 Recommendations for graphics cards and monitors ceccecceeceeeceesseeeseeeeees 268 Notebooks and Shap iic CardScan eaetnceasisdaniedeinces ahaa ieee 268 Primary and SECONGAary SCLEENS sectesuenstassieendieandantanys sebedasenadi a asadeusenps wbelasmees 269 CDP CHa TOME SC CEN estat ees stere ve taict dtrestra ya a E allot detuasades 270 8 2 Configuring your computer for Sound ccccccccssrrrsssssssssssssscssssccccccssssseees 270 Recommendations for SOUN cc ceeescecccccccceeeesseeeccecceeeaeeeseeeceeeeeseseeenseeeeeee
97. 45 Hertz Editing channel 11 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name Sample rate for this channel Signal source 1 signal source Z Category of data processing Type of computation IIR Bandpass filter subtype or Parameter Butterworth cascaded Order of filter rd order Show Frequency Response OU to 45 00 Hz Key Type of UNIT to display Default COLOR for this data channel OK V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 47 Note these filters and in fact all data processing functions are implemented in software only the NeXus hardware itself does need to process any data The advantage of this is that you are free to configure your data processing at any time which offers flexibility that hardware fixed processing is never able to match EEG signals such as Theta Alpha and Beta waves are derived from the EEG sensor input in the same way Those AC wave signals are also sampled at 256 samples per second and their filter settings are set according to their proper definitions Then using the filtered waves the amplitudes of the EEG bands are derived In this fashion the Theta Amplitude is derived from the Theta Wave Theta Amplitude is computed 32 times per second and is always positive Use the Theta amplitude another data channel can be computed called the Alpha Theta Ratio by dividing the Alpha amplitude by the
98. 64 LBaseline lt enter new type here gt 2 Train Jotessor i 4 Delax Add segment type 5 Positve feedback 6 Negative feedback Delete type 7 Positive transfer amp Negative transfer 9 Feedback 10 Transfer 1LiL Undefined 12 Awake 13 Stage 1 14 5tage 2 You enter the text of a new type in the text field on the right top and then press Add segment type to add it to the list The new entry will be placed at the bottom of the list If you select Delete Type the segment type at the bottom will be removed The OK buttons leaves and closes the dialog box Note BioTrace supports a maximum of 64 different types of segments These new segments type definitions will be saved when you close the application so that next time you start up the application they will be there BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 117 Defining and Adding Event Markers Markers are just like segments a visual way of labeling your data An event marker however has no size It is a single point in time when something is marked Event markers can be entered manually or automatically They are stored internally with a 1 millisecond precision Event Markers are represented visually by a single vertical dotted line in your session overview See sample below Select Channels for Overview Event markers Delete marker Analysis Functions Recompute Session Overview
99. BioTrace Members 176 system can be asked and explored It is not our intent to Category Professional fashion a clinical case review group or to provide mentoring for purposes of national certification Rather it is our intent to Activity within 7 days 2 New Members 2 New Messages Promote Founded Jun 19 2005 z create a community of NeXus 10 BioTrace users who are Language English supportive of one another s continuing mastery of the system s hardware and software Yahoo Groups Tips Message History Did you know Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Want your group to be Seictimee ens ten Yid 2006 79 38 99 26 24 10 46 46 29 31 Groups website Add a 2005 3 33 29 29 43 araun nhoata to Flickr a Note the address 1s http health groups yahoo com group Nexus10 NeXus Web pages This will open the special webpages that are dedicated To the NeXus NeXus 16 NeXus 32 and other NeXus products You will be able to find and download technical information and special documentation here The address is www nexusproductinfo com Whats New This will show a PDF document with the latest improvements and new functions of the software V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 66 4 3 Right Clicking amp Drop down menus Apart from the main menu bar which 1s always visible at the top of the primary screen you will often us
100. BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 223 Now you select a simple Single tone from the Flute as shown below MIDI tone feedback settings Musical Instrument MIDI tone melody settings Acoustic grand Piano Piano 1d l Celesta Marimba Vibraphone a Single Tone on off Acoustic Guitar Nylon str Gt n Chord on off Clarinet Pad 1 sweep pad Minor 3 Pad 2 warm Maj Standard Rhythm Maj Orchestral harp Min 15 eee wee POR eee or OOS PROP PPP d Y ange tone sequence Major scale Melodic minor Chromatic Whole tone PPC CCC a Min Fine more tones eo I _ Use Repeating Single Tone Cancel i Then press OK and close all dialog boxes Press the Replay button at the bottom of the screen and the session you just loaded will start to play Every time the EMG amplitude goes over threshold you will hear a single flute tone which will stay for as long as the level is above threshold When the signal goes below threshold the tone will disappear The reason is that you did not set any sound at the Below Threshold option Right click the bargraph again and choose Feedback Options Then select Increment Reward Counter for the option below threshold Enter a required time below threshold of 1000 ms BELOW Threshold Increment Reward Counter Required TIME below oS For each block of 1 second of time that
101. C Mind Media Netherlands 2004 2003 Concise Client and Session information Client John Sample ID 000026a Session Sample session with byp tmp sc rsp temp Date Time 12 48 20 15 6 2004 Duration 5min21sec Channel in A i gt Th1 lt Th2 Sensor E SC GSR 4 10 0 11 100 00 0 00 Sensor F Temp 7 7 97 38 0 01 i 100 00 0 00 Sensor H RSP 1614 95 2455 41 85 01 71 71 140 05 243 15 6 81 0 51 Page i of i You can print this preview on your color or monochrome printer Although by default the portrait orientation is assumed you may choose landscape as well BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 113 Adding Segments manually After selecting a segment the next option that will be available is the Add Segment option Through this option you will keep the selected segment and mark it as being of one of the available types Yes you can add your own segment TYPE definitions ey Segment add Segment i Baseline Segment add Artifact area 2 Train Segment TYPE definitions ee Positive feedback Negative feedback Positive transfer Negative transfer a O Feedback H 10 Transfer 11 Undefined 12 Awake 13 Stage 1 14 Stage 2 15 Stage 3 16 Stage 4 L REM Stage 18 Movement Analysis Functions k zoom SELECTE dala Export SELECTED data Close The purpose of segment is to mark
102. COPYRIGHTED PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BioTrace software copyright by Mind Media B W Roermond Herten Netherlands ww w mind media info V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 12 Now the next dialog box is shown where you enter the installation directory of BioTrace For NeXus 10 it is C BioTrace For NeXus 4 it is C BioTrace4 Directory Directory Choose an installation folder and click Next to continue BioTrace s files will be installed in the following directory C BioTrace Disk space needed 546 Mb Available disk space 131100 Click Next to continue We advise you to install BioTrace in a root directory such as C D etc so that it will be easy for you to locate BioTrace files on your computer Make sure the drive has enough space In the case shown above the drive has over 130 gigabyte free space In the next dialog box you can press START to begin the installation Confirmation Confirmation You are now ready to install BioTrace Thi program will install BioTrace into C BioTrace Click Start to install BioTrace V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 13 1 4 Step 4 Shockwave and DirectX Installation This chapter is only for Windows XP users the BioTrace Software utilizes Adobe Macromedia shockwave technology You can install this option from the quick start menu Please
103. Compute Statistics b Artifact Rejection d Size of TIME axis Close Selecting a marker If you move the mouse over an event marker the mouse will turn into a double arrow pointing two ways horizontally gt indicating you can move it or edit it Right clicking will bring up the drop down menu that you see in the picture above You add markers by 1 Pressing the ENTER key during live session recording you can enter a text while the session recording continues 2 Pressing the SPACE Bar during live session recording This way you do not enter a text but an automatic marker text will be generated like Marker 1 Marker 2 for each time you press the space bar 3 Selecting automatic marker generation in your protocols When a specific screen 1s shown in a sequence of screens you can tell the software to set a marker at the point where the screen becomes visible Deleting and Renaming Event markers By selecting a marker and choose the menu options shown above you can rename or delete an event marker You can also select a marker gt symbol will appear and then press the Delete key on your keyboard This will delete the event marker as well BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 118 Exporting Session Data In some cases you will want to export data from the BioTrace software to another application for very specific data processing or statistical analysis BioTrace c
104. G A OON a A Uh ul Ud OTOES A OO an aniani a amaian an akasmi aa oaninadiass aa kaiaia ain daai tale adamianma ale Waamini daa dannii ai P R 00 00 000 m Session control buttons Time display Time slider The screen caption and menu bar The screen caption is used to display information about the software the name of the screen and client that are currently selected When you press the F key on your keyboard the screen caption and windows taskbar at the bottom will disappear The menu bar is used to control the main functions of the software such as loading and saving screens opening sessions and configuring data channels and sensors m 3 DIO I race Ssottware tor NeAus 1U screen lt EMG LUN n DYF 1emp Screen Lent lt Jonn sample gt File Screen Configuration Help BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 100 The functions of the main menu bar are explained in chapter 4 2 You can also use the caption to move and resize the main primary window This is a standard windows function Use these buttons x to resize the main window Full screen mode Tip You can use the F key on your keyboard to switch to and from Full screen mode The session control buttons These buttons are used to 1 Exit the application 2 Switch to the main menu pressing Esc does the same 3 STOP the session while recording or replaying 4 Replay a previously stored
105. G activity can be made audible in a tone sequence The Fine options will add more tones to the sequence BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 155 Biofeedback Midi Song feedback Midi Song feedback Edit Selecting this option will bring up the following dialog box MIDI song feedback settings Selected songs Max relaxO1 mid i BOURREE MID CRYSTALS MID relax 1 mid relax02 mid _ Loop Song s b You can choose from the following options 1 Set the volume of the MIDI song with the vertical slider 2 Add songs to the Selected Songs list from the list of available songs on the right Use the and gt buttons 3 The Loop Songs option will loop the song back to the start when it has finished It will also loop a list of songs Note this feedback option is useful for generating audio feedback but the sound quality of MIDI songs is generally less than digitized sound music So you may want to take a look at that option as well BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 156 Biofeedback CD Audio feedback CD Audio feedback When you choose CD Audio feedback and click the edit button a dialog box will be shown where you can choose which track s you want to play CD tracks Selected tracks Available tracks Up Down You begin by selecting the CD drive It is quite common for desktop computers to have more than 1 drive
106. MSSD ms NN50 count pNN5O HRV FFT Results Frequency Unit Value VLF power ms 2 300 5 VLF 3 230 LF power ms 2 11710 9 LF 91 55 HF power ms 2 779 9 HF 6 10 LF HF ratio 15 0 Artifacts 0 026 of the IRF dave 0 bears out of 412 were rejected ag a Note The HRV Specoum 0 0 4Hz wes a non paramebic FFT 1024 poini on debended AR intervals interpolated at 4Hz Page I of I Above this preview a number of buttons will be shown If you press the Print button you can print the page on the printer of your choice If you choose a color printer the report will be printed in color If you choose a monochrome printer the printout will be in black and white BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 126 The Correlation Analysis function The correlation analysis function provides you with an estimate of the linear correlation between two source signals This function uses a Pearson Product Moment on epoch based channel data Epochs contain summary data and statistics which are stored 4 times per second Therefore the correlation function works well on analyzing slow signals or trends over longer time periods Greater than 10 seconds Slow signals in this case mean physiological activity generally below 10 Hz Examples of some slow signals The respiration graph and the respiration frequency Heart rate HR Skin Conductance Slow Cortical Potentials Skin Te
107. Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 243 Subtraction The function Subtract sourcel source2 computes the difference of the signal values from sourcel and source2 and puts the results back in the resulting channel It repeats this function for each value in the array of data values that a signal holds Result n Sourcel n Source2 n Example Source1 Source2 Result OON OAR OMNO an rhrRWWNHDND RWWNMNH t OO e Source l Source2 Result Multiplication The function Multiply sourcel source2 computes the product of the signal values from source and source2 and puts the results back in the resulting channel It repeats this function for each value in the array of data values that a signal holds Result n Sourcel n Source2 n Example Source1 Source2 Result Source l Source2 Result 0 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 4 3 2 6 4 3 12 5 3 15 6 4 24 7 4 28 8 5 40 g 5 45 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 244 Division The function Division sourcel source2 computes the ratio of the signal values from source and source2 and puts the results back in the resulting channel It repeats this function for each value in the array of data values that a signal holds Result n Sourcel n Source2 n Example Source1 Source2 Result
108. Ni A Ik A li Mh Lm fir al i y J VV y VAIN i Yi Ti j f AAAI AFN y pe Vhs ra Uh I VW MA di Yy y S v v YV ar dhi vo Y y N Yy yY yu wv y y y a f Ath anti Anann AAAA A aA AAT ai if At atlas WA Nana h f hr AARAA n Vu tan tits hy aft ns vi Tit l iP Tir wl H LAr yay vi AAAA wy Wry j Val fl N iu i M j i wif al iF it WANA MV Wie ANS WY y vy Afi AN y y ws Ahlan vi ath I i A A rae TT ae z TA ea A A Aire Ai asa SEF YT SIRAN p ARAARA Vee a s mn eee PE ye eer oe a ee See i Jl jisa fin VAAN ATA a In Ae ey nites Us vd ya A fal ea AAA aa ey eT AAA nA AR AR AAAI RAR ARI ANIL IAA AA RAN AAT AIM j wu Se ant lant gy oy PAANAN AA Nyy ANY Al te Nh AN sd ete ANAT VAWA Nhe MAT nya aAa a Arh AANA Sai ne occa S ERRAN PA nh Aa au ST Ru aca MAANU an Mi EAA LAAN LAN Ld ane AACA D UNA al va hee Gata ace ass ane ome AATA D deste a lh em sean Linea ss hacia ena ads hit sacs KAA MAA TAR ti LELA D DAANAN aetna a a ala aso Tit 00 02 00 04 00 06 The instrument auto scales the signals so the signal will always fit The main use for this instrument is get a Live Overview of multiple channels in a single instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 180 Instruments the Spectrogram The 9th object on the toolbar is the Spectrogram Instrument This instrument displays a spectral analysis of a channel in a different way than a regular FFT Spectrum The Frequencies are displayed vertically
109. OLUME Musical Instrument MIDI tone melody settings Acoustic grand Piano Piano 1d l Celesta Marimba vibraphone z Acoustic Guitar Nylon str Gt d Parsia rd on off Clarinet Pad 1 sweep pad Pad 2 warm Standard Rhythm Orchestral harp range tone sequence Harmonic minor Melodic minor Chromatic Whole tone Fine more tones Min C E ese Repentno Sne Tore In this dialog box you can choose the following options 1 The volume of the MIDI tone s that will be played 2 The musical instrument that will play the tone 3 The height of the MIDI tone use the horizontal slider 4 The type of tones you will play Single tone Chord or Sequence Volume Set a volume between min and max by moving the slider up and down Musical Instrument select highlight one of the instruments in the list Single Tone this option will play a single tone only Note that the tone will stay ON for as long the feedback condition is true For as long as the level remains below above threshold Some instruments by nature however only play briefly an example is the piano A flute instrument has a long sustain Chord BioTrace will play a number of tones at once forming a chord of the type that you can pick from the list below Y range tone sequence this is a form of continuous feedback where the level above threshold will determine the next tone that will be played For example the increasing decreasing level of EM
110. OS or this Software will run error free under all conditions This poses the risk that data signals or statistics may be represented incorrectly become invalid or data may get lost Therefore we urge you to make regular backups if maintaining the data for the long term is important to you e The operator is responsible for the safety of any device including the computer printers accessories and other attached apparatus that is used by the BioTrace Software or attached to the computer that is running BioTrace Attention e This software should never be used for diagnostic purposes vital monitoring or for life supporting systems Limitation of liability Insofar as is maximally permitted under the applicable prescriptive law neither Mind media nor its suppliers or dealers are liable under any circumstances for any indirect exceptional incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the Biotrace Software the product or from the inability to use it including but not restricted to the damage arising from loss of goodwill work interruption computer defects or faults or any other damage or losses consequential upon business interruption even if the possibility of these occurring had been mentioned and irrespective of the legal or impartial theory agreement unlawful act or otherwise on which the losses are based In any case and pursuant to any of the provisions of the present agreement the total liability of Mind med
111. RY statistics You may choose manual and or automatic removal Artifact IBIs can be removed or interpolated Type of IBI artifact removal IBI removal interpolation Automatic removal criteria _ Manual only use marked artifact areas _ Automatic only use automatic removal criteria Combined use artifact areas AND automatic removal Remove IBI without interpolation a Replace IBI by interpolated data Method IBIIn fIBIIn 1 IBI 2 Percent difference remove if difference v To a between IBI n and IBI n 1 greater than Upper limit IBI value greater than ms Lower limit IBI value less than 500 ms Cancel You can choose from the following options 1 Manual Artifact removal This option only uses the manually marked artifact areas to reject bad IBI data Automatic Artifact Removal This option will include all IBI table also those within artifact areas and only use the automatic removal criteria to 2 3 reject bad IBI data Combined This option combines manual and automatic removal So it will reject any data within a manually marked artifact area and data that fulfills the automatic removal criteria Removal in this case means that these IBI values are being skipped and thus removed from the IBI table No session data will be removed Next you need to decide what to do once you reject IBI values Removing bad IBI data from the IBI table may som
112. Rmax HRmin methods typically do A linked Numerical Instrument When the instrument is linked to another instrument it starts to function differently It will change into a threshold counter or animation frame counter You can set these options under the Display Options amp Ranges right of the Data Type Stats option splay above threshold wt Neplaw above threshold Display below threshold Display count animation frames Display count animation cycles The numerical instrument can also be used to display the Reward Counter Note for this option to be available the instrument should be connected to a data channel rather than being linked Example below an example is shown for a design of 4 instruments The Bargraph the first and third Numerical instruments are connected to the Theta data channel The numerical instrument in the middle is linked to the bargraph instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 187 Connected to Theta Data Channel A Theta amplitude Actual Theta Level Linked to Bargraph Instrument Threshold Score below Threshold Rewards 22 Linked to Bargraph Instrument Threshold The Theta Bargraph instrument has a feedback setting that is Increment Reward Counter below threshold when the signal stays there for another 250 ms BELOW Threshold Increment Reward Counter Requi
113. Signal source 1 Signal source 2 Category of data processing Type of UNIT to display Default COLOR for this data channel This display the definition of the sensor input C defined as being the raw EMG signal sampled at 2048 samples per second There is no category data processing that you can select here The only options you can change here are 1 The name of the sensor channel 2 The type of the UNIT used to display the data 3 The default color that is used when the data channel is displayed in the session Overview screen You can use the left and right arrows at the bottom to navigate through the channels Once you press OK the changes you made will be stored and the dialog box will close When you press apply the changes are applied but the dialog box stays open In most cases you will not change the sensor channel definitions Now let s look at the definition of another channel In this case we look at channel 34 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 93 Editing channel 34 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name Sample rate for this channel 2048 Samples per Sec Signal source 1 SensorliEMG raw Signal source 2 Category of data processing Digital Filters Type of computations IIR Bandpass filter Subtype or Parameter Butterworth cascaded Order of filter 4th order Show Frequency Response 0 00 to 500 00 Hz Rey Type of UNIT to display Default COLOR f
114. Table Artifact Rejection Size of TIME axis Close You can choose now to delete THIS segment or even all segments Please note again that only the segment selections markings will be deleted The actual data itself will remain intact Another way of deleting segments is even simpler Simply select a single segment left click it and press the Delete key on your keyboard A message box will appear that wants you to confirm that you really want to delete it Delete segment Press the YES button to delete the segment or NO to cancel Defining and adding your own Segment Types BioTrace has a number of standard types of segments built in But you can add your own type definitions to this list Right click the session overview screen and choose the option Segment options gt Segment TYPE definitions You do not need to select a segment for this option to work BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 116 Select Channels for Overview TT Y a J Event markers _Segmentoptons Delete A segments Analysis Functions Segment TYPE definitions Recompute Session Overview Compute Statistics Artifact Rejection d Close M After you click this option the following dialog box will be shown Definition of segment TYPES max
115. Trace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 40 After you select this the screen browser dialog box will be displayed Screen browser LOADING a new screen Select a screen CATEGORY Then select a SCREEN from thumbnail image list below D ouble clicking on a Thumbnail will load the screen Basic Screens EEG Screens EMG screens Favorite Screens Migraine and Headache Oo M E Multi Modality Screens EMG 8VP Tmp EMG1 raw Respiration Screens Stress Protocol Long Stress Protocol Short PAP ia MAT hi li MultiScreen 1 MultiScreen 3 v Screennotes Delete Screen TIP another quick and easy way to LOAD a screen and open up the screen browser is by pressing the L key on your keyboard 1 Select the Favorite Screen category by clicking on it with the left mouse 2 Then select the Temp 2 screen at the bottom by double left clicking it It will be loaded and displayed ec t The temperature at your finger tip normally is between 30 an 36 degrees Celsius During Vasodilation expansion of your bloodvessels skin temperature in the extremities usually or Vv Skin temperature chan V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 41 We will now switch to the screen editor mode by pressing the E key on the keyboard The screen will now be displayed in the edit mode BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt Temp 2 scree
116. Trial Counter by a value one Note the segment will cover the period from the click time of the button to the moment that a new segment is created BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 208 Objects the Video Capture Object The 20th object on the toolbar is the Video Capture Object This object captures video from a digital camera or webcam during a live session When the session is replayed the video signal will be in syne with the physiological data stream with a precision of about 50 100 milliseconds That means that generally you can look at the relationship with the video images and sound and the physiological data on a frame by frame basis Note you must install the drivers of the video camera or webcam before you can use this function Connect the camera before starting BioTrace Below a screenshot is shown of a sample video capture screen from the Basic Screens category E BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt Video Capture Test Screen screen gt Client lt John Sample gt File Screen Configuration Help Connect a WEBCAM such as the Logitech QuickCam Pro 4000 to the USB port of your computer Then start a new NeXus 10 recording Amplitude Heart Rate 118 54 70 00 1 5 l x s e R 0004 0006 00 083 K Et S Menu aly SER ooroo TY lS gt You can only use 1 video capture object on the primary or secondary screen During the session the video
117. User Manual for the Biolrace Software BioTrace is a product of Mind Media B V Netherlands www mindmedia info Please read this manual carefully before using the BioTrace Software V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 1 1 0 Installation of the SoftWare scree RRA ARIA AR 8 Step i Check your Compute rl carrieres arisa aes are Ea ONE NSN 8 1 2 Step 2 Start the Quick Start Menw cccccccsssssssssccccccssssssssssscccccsscssssscsees 10 DS Step 32 Install Biol rac e scsksessesesivesecussensssacessweustseuseteseessecuestesesesensseeeteneesteacss 12 1 4 Step 4 Shockwave and DirectX Installation ccsssssssscccccccsssssssseees 14 1 5 Step 5 Restart and check Windows XP VersiON ssssssssccccccsesssssseees 15 1 6 Step 6 Bluetooth Driver Installation ssssscsscccsssssssssssssccccccscesssssceees 16 1 7 Step 7 Finalize the Installation ssseeeeeooccssssseeeoccsssssceceoocosssssececesssssssceeosoo 20 2 0 Getting Started a Quick Introduction cccccccccssssssssssssssssssssssscccccccccccccccccsssseees 21 ZLA DOUE His MANUAL f25iciessscacenvictievnssesusesdsatscsepsicacenpactiexvesesteesiaatsasepsssanenvaatiasmens 21 Intended use orthis Mian all csc neath Sets au tain Sivas tonne neat Seles naataia See tomeneanneee 21 SCR TCAD ACK eae heatiden sonciais ovaa A eaten A E AE 21 Disclaimer aid WAINENE ZZ 2 2 MANE Mam Menisin aS 23 2 3 Foint
118. Using the Undo function Ctrl Z sristi iinitan a E eh 217 Loading and attaching a channel set nenessssooeeeesssssssoetersssssssseereesssssssseeeees 217 Connecting and Linking Instruments essnee E 218 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 5 Biofeedback Options and Ini Dit sce ievetets tu cecn hw evincsetiiec wanien taieeetanesss 221 SESSION QVEL VIC W SOUL OS aires ra E Ei 221 Savine HES e atest suacar teh stee a cucaielenhateniaeiaiei ad taaincusuielacSateniedaiai aS oot naeauie 221 6 2 Example 1 building an EMG screen ccccccccsssssssssssscsccccsccsssssssscccooees 222 Displaying he reward COUNIED creeer ented oes 224 6 3 Example 2 building a Screen with an Animation cccccccsssssssssscccooees 227 6 4 Example 3 building a Screen with Inhibits ssccssssccsssssssssssssccsooees 230 6 3 Screen PUNO CUPS ss ciessscacesgseeschossasasusieedscvetsicasesesetsetocsacasesieetscvecsacasesesezeevoese 234 0 6 Bildin Protocols csere a a 233 Button based hyperlinked protocols enssssssseennsssssssseeerssssssssseeresssssssseeeees 236 Sequence Script based Protocols sarine E EE 237 The protocol SCRIPT COM Ol erni aaae i 238 The options f the screens in SCQUENCE casa esis endo 239 Making protocols available to others nnnesssseoennnsssssssseeerssssssssserresssssssseeeees 239 6 7 Protocol B ilding UPS vcciccsessessscdenecacvessvevevscnscen
119. a The Water Effect Instrument uses a special digital effect that is computed on the fly It shows a water ripple effect where the height of the ripples reflects the magnitude of the attached physiological signal The maximum ripple level is at the top of the range In the example below you see the water effect reflecting the EMG amplitude level during a relaxation session The lower the EMG level the less ripples will be visible Kal BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt EMG Relaxation water ripples screen gt Client lt John Sample gt File Screen Configuration Help EMG level Relaxation make the water still n y gt Dy gera IF Time above threshold 19 3 X Exit Menu STOP Replay i Record 00 16 650 144 This instrument is either Connected to a data directly or Linked to another instrument If the Water Effect Instrument is connected to a data channel directly you need to set a manual range Under Display Options amp Ranges BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 183 Select Image Connect to data channel Edit data channel Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close The advantage of choosing Link to Instrument is that the Water Effect Instrument will use the range settings of the other instrument In the example on the former
120. a trend report we can plot a graph that shows the mean level of EMG activity expressed in microvolts from session to session In order to reduce the amount of data a trend report is often based on summary statistics that cover a larger span of time If you observe a decrease of the minimum and mean EMG level from session to session this could indicate that a specific relaxation training you are using is making progress BioTrace leaves it up to you what type of data you want to generate trend reports on Please note that any data channel in BioTrace can be used for generating a trend report In order to generate a new report click the button Create NEW Report Create NEW Report You now have to select the following items 1 A number of sessions minimally 2 2 A number of channels 1 4 3 The statistics you want to trend per channel 1 or 2 Generate a NEW Trend Report In this dialog box you select the parameters that BioTrace requires for generating a NEW trend report Select Multiple Sessions min 2 max 250 Select up to 4 DATA CHANNELS to report on 15 06 2004 Sample session with bvp tmp sc rsj 23 A Theta amplitude 2XEMG session 23 06 2004 EEG 1 Channel 25 A SMR amplitude Video Capture Test BYP 5 ERKG HR Session Not applicable 2 EEG SCP Recording Not applicable ERP audio low hi tone ERP with audio hi and low tone Select which STATISTICS should be used in the report EMG f
121. a aoeaenen ceeendaseuaweeend 68 Screen Enum Dial PEO ViC Ww S enr a E A R E 68 L di g Screens mthe screen DOW SET oscinina eee esa teeieeinees 69 screen Function Keys Quick 1OaG scaigundies tewiainnecucetetecwaceapildbeasdowsaa suautsledeawensdies 69 PEKNE SCC S118 asia ss acco pod ca sila suatucen E A Da 69 Copy ine Or EMANN SCreens ienis an eb erie cha 69 SCENO ornare eaa a a a a veauttaus thet ttascdaaaiiohedainient 70 SAVO STEEN S ein E a A a 70 4 5 The Client Session Database esseeosseossseosssecsseocsseocsseossseosseocssecssseossseosseooss 71 dit Cent Lt ornai OM aeoaea 71 Pere el Li 01 re nee rT ER a eer nee ene 72 AAC TE A E A OEA A T2 Ed SCSSIOM NOC S eran a a a a A iit 73 Clinical Manaceme nterne a a a ancl yoke 73 RACING A TINCT ADI SE er EEEE 74 Delete Sessea e EAA E A 74 koad SESSION smaram E E EEE 74 Dearly a Flasi Sessi Oecum R A E 75 apor PES SESSIONS co ance nthe dle osetia cds ee ane t naa tot 76 Ceneratine AP RenC ING POM cy astern a a hee in Reece ge 79 WbDatdoes a Trend Report SNOW siiiScaseceiicw ie ahcaaieracett a 80 Usine Sesmentsin Trend Reports sosise r 81 Trend Reports graphic Output Options c cc seeesseccccccecceeeseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaas 83 4 6 SCNSOFC ONES UFAUION co sessao tire eee osan eaaa e iaa 85 Bio Tracet Sens r Cong ratoN asser aE a EEA REE nR 85 Unlocking and changing Sensor Sample rates cccececeecececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenaas 89 Preparing and using Flash Memory Sess
122. ace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 214 Objects the Flash Animation Object The 24 and last object on the toolbar is the Flash Animation Object BioTrace utilizes macromedia shockwave technology This is the same technology that is used frequently in website technology Macromedia shockwave is a very powerful technology that supports many animation techniques and even video files in the SWF format Shockwave flash format ki macromedia SHOCKWAVE You can embed SWF file based animations in the BioTrace screens and use them for instructions or information purposes When an SWF file contains a lot of information or is big it may take some time to load The SWF files are stored in the BioTrace SWF directory You can put your own SWE files in here to enrich the BioTrace screens and protocols E bio race Software for NeXus 14 ycreen lt FlashExample screen gt Client lt John Sample gt K File Screen Configuration Help xa ry aie e i on you see a right you see a ah 3 Click in the button to see a Next Object gt Exit Menu ISOP DRE NS STUN Ra ooo LY E TT BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 215 6 0 Building and Creating new Screens There are two ways to create a new Screen 1 You modify an existing screen 2 You start from scratch The first method has the advantage that you could use a sample or templat
123. ace these files into a designated BioTrace screen directory in order for the screen browser to find them for instance BioTrace Screens EMG Screens V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 69 Screen Notes In order to make it easier for users of the BioTrace Screens you may enter screen notes These screen notes by be edited viewed by selecting a screen and clicking in the Screen Notes button The user can view these notes later on by pressing the N key on the keyboard when the screen is displayed in the primary screen Saving Screens The screen browser is also used to save screens When the Save Screen As option is selected from the main menu bar you can save the current primary screen as enter a description name Biolrace Software for NeXus 10 a Screen Configuration Help Build New Screen Save Screen Ctrl 5 Save Screen As Load a Screen CL When you are saving a screen the preview thumbnail will be shown and you can enter the description of the screen and the name of the person who designed it SAVE as a NEW screem MindMediaBy Please note we advise you to save screens in the Feedback mode This will make sure the thumbnail will show up correctly Saving a screen while in the session overview mode will show a different thumbnail V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus
124. amplitude A Beta amplitude A Gamma amplitude B Theta amplitude B Alpha amplitude EB SMR amplitude B Beta amplitude B Gamma amplitude EMG l raw EMG Taw EMG 1 ampl EMG2 Ampl EMG 1 EMG2 EMG 1 EMG2 BVP amplitude Av DC EEG SCF ASEMG Artifact B EMG Artifact A Median Freq B Median Freq Alpha Coherence Theta Coherence Ema De Page 119 In this dialog box you can make the following selections 1 The channels you want to export 2 The start and end of the segment of data you want to export this is usually already filled out when you have selected export of a selected area 3 What data you want to export the selected area or the entire session 4 You can exclude artifact segments 5 The output sample rate of the data 6 The output format TAB separated ASCII 7 Whether you want repeat slower data channels Example if you export two channels one fast at 2048 SPS and one slow at 128 SPS the repeat will fill in the gaps between the two 8 What you want to include time event markers segment markers etc Important when you select multiple channels that have different sample rates you may want to select the highest sample rate as your OUTPUT rate That will mean that your slower data will be up sampled or repeated and no data 1s lost When you choose a slower sample rate than the fastest channel say your fastest channel is EEG sampled at 256 SPS and you choose 128 SPS as out
125. an export its data to ASCII formatted files that your can read with applications such as SPSS MatLab or MS Excel There are two ways to export data from a session The first is to go through File in the main menu bar The second is to select highlight a segment of data in the session overview screen and then choose Export Selected Data from the drop down menu Segment compute Statistics Segment add Segment Segment add Artifact area Segment TYPE definitions Analysis Functions Zoom SELECTED data Export SELECTED data Close This option will bring up the Session Export dialog box EXPORT of Session data Select multiple DATA channels for export Time Settings Time START 100221 format hh mm ss format hh mm ss y only entire session entire session _ Exdude data in ARTIFACT segments Output options Type of DATA All Data Samples 32 SPS ka TAB delimited ASCII Output Rate Output Format _ REPEAT data in slower channels Additional options Indude TIME as hh mm ss _ Indude TIME as sample intervals _ Indude EVENT markers Indude SEGMENT markers BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 206 SPS 256 SPS 32 SPS 32 SPS 32 SPS 32 SPS 32 SPS 32 OPS 32 OPS 22 SPS ow SPS 22 SPS Clear Selection B Beta Wave B Gamma wave A Theta amplitude A Alpha amplitude ASMR
126. and Analog types of biofeedback cccccccccsseesseeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeaaas 55 3 6 The Respiration HRV Pacer eeeecocosssssceeeococsssececeooccssssscecoccssssssceeecosssssseee 56 Pacer parane iE onanan a eae cs te eee cr nal 56 4 0 The user Interface main LUNCTIONS ccccccceeenssesccccccccccccssssccccccccccccesssscccccccceeees 58 4 1 Shortcut keys and on the fly screen Switching ccccccccssssssssssssccccscsesees 58 On the fly switching between screens eessessseseeeesssssssseeersssssssescerrsssssssseeeees 59 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 2 Quick overview of the keyboard short Cuts 2 0 ecccccccccccccsssseesseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 60 4 2 The BioTrace Menu Bar Function Overview cccccssscccssscccssssccssssccesees 62 The ibe MS MUM e S raa R 62 Enese enmen ES eaa a a e 63 The COni eral On Ment OMS sessar 64 The Help Menu memso e E EE i uicuaen 65 4 3 Right Clicking amp Drop down menus ssseecseccssssscceecccsssssececoocossssececooosssssssee 67 Properties of Instruments amp Objects n nssesssssoeeresssssssscerrssssssssceeressssssseeeeres 67 Properdes of NG SCLC IN c E A aac 67 Properties of scales in the session overview mode ssseenssssssssseeersssssssseeeeees 67 4 4 The Screen Browser ecseecsseecssecossecossecssecossecossecossecsseecssecossecossecssseessecossecoss 68 SCN CAOT ES isaac ccasceda seus aetn
127. and Click Protocols winscesderusesunczeiiedeesdeevehvaanedadusuauscunshesdeeedeeualuaanesSavuseses 24 2 4 Demo Protocols BVP example cccccccccssssssssssssssssssssssssscccccccssssssssseeeeeeees 25 29 SC Temperature example nissun ennen saar ea EE E E 30 2 0 SESSION CONrOl DUON Szira aaa DaT a Eei 31 2 7 Your first session recording ssseceeccccsssseceeecccossssceceooosssssseceecssssssseeeceosssssseee 32 ZS DAVIS A SESSIO iec a 37 29 L adine a SESSION sste n E ER AERE 38 2 10 Summary of what you have learnt ssseceecsscecccccscecccccssececccssecccccssecceccsseceeeo 39 3 0 Key concepts i BIO ITACOT ionerne e a A E e E a oas 40 DS LDISPIAYV SCECENG aoriseiiseii ian eR RE 40 Rieht clicking amp property MENUS eiei E weence ate 42 Dual monitors Primary and Secondary screens cc cceeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 44 32 Data C hannels esesten Ena EEE EAEEREN a NaS 45 SCOSOR COME Cll ALON eer E E E ES 46 JI SESSIONS esera Ea EE E EE NO EEE EESE 49 Dee O E EESE A E EAT T IET I E EESE ELIE R ASER 51 Client Properties vnc intaiadien vatetsnstenoriaantenddsroatiws hetaaetabadinh etd davasauey teletaantabewuah ee 52 3 5 Biofeedback options amp Inhibit functions sssssscececcccssssceeceocsssssscecocosssssssee 53 Supported types of audio visual feedback nnesssseoeenssssssssseeerssssssssserresssssssees 53 Positive and Negative Feedback amp Inhibit states 2 0 0 eeeccccccccceeesseseeeeeeeeeeeees 53 Digital
128. ant to set a fixed range A fixed range makes it easier to compare signals to each other The auto scale range will change every time you scroll through the session data These are the options manual range auto range D max w auto range min max Inverse Polarity 1 Manual range you need to enter this manually 2 An automatic range with 0 as the minimum and a floating maximum 3 An automatic range where both the lower and upper values are set by the software min max 4 Inverse polarity This option only inverts the display of line graphs in the Y direction This may be useful when displaying SCP signals where the polarity is inversed negative values being plotted as going upwards Option 5 threshold settings Display Thresholds Change Threshold1 Change Threshold You can choose to enable display of the thresholds in the overview mode with the first option Display Thresholds The other two options enable you to enter a threshold value which will be displayed as dotted lines in the graph and which will be included in the session statistics A sample of the threshold lines shown in a HR graph is shown in the next picture 100 0 When computing statistics the settings of the thresholds will provide an estimated value of the percentage of time the signal was above threshold 1 and below threshold 2 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 110 Selecting and marking Segments Segments a
129. are requested to fill in the PIN code You only need to fill in this PIN code once The PIN code consists of the last 4 number of the serial code shown in the name In this example that means NeXus 0928040011 so you fill in the last part which is 0011 Note in your case the last 4 numbers will be different 4 Nexus 1 0 0928040011 Before a connection can be established this computer and the device above must be paired Device Hame The Bluetooth pairing procedure creates a secret key that is used in all future connections between these two devices to establish identity and encrypt the data that these devices exchange To create the paired relationship enter the PIN code and click OF Cancel Bluetooth PIM Code Fill in the last 4 numbers in here BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 282 After you have filled in the PIN code you are ready to make the first connection to the NeXus The first time you do this by hand After that the BioTrace software will handle everything Double click on the NeXus ICON to connect See example below My Bluetooth Places Entire Bluetooth Neighborhood Fie Edit View Bluetooth Favorites Tools Help Back ki gt Bi JO Search Folders Address E My Bluetooth Places Entire Bluetooth Neighborhood Additional oe Nexus 10 0978040011 Unknown Majorfsi3 Min 9 Paired Bluetooth Tasks Bluetooth
130. array of 1 channel 8Poly Line graph No Displays up to 32 channels on 1 time scale 9 Spectrogram No Displays a horizontal spectrum using color for intensity 10 Clock Instrument Yes Counts small increments of channel data 11 Water Effect Instr No Translates physiological signals into water ripples 12 Numerical Instr No Displays numerical data of a channel 13 Direct X plug in Yes Uses special DirectX effect to visualize signals 14 Zoomer instr Yes Displays expanding contracting graphs 15 Animation Instr No Uses bitmapped animations to visualize signals 16 Video Replay Obj No Plays video files in a window 17 Text Object No Displays 1 or more lines of text 18 Image Object No Displays static images jpg bmp 19 Button Control No Displays a button that can execute commands and navigate to other screens 20 Video Capture No Captures Video from a digital video camera 21 Audio Capture No Captures Sound from a microphone or audio source 22 DVD replay No Plays a DVD movie in a window 23 Game Object Yes Displays biofeedback driven games 24 Flash Animation No Plays Macromedia Flash Animations Maximum number of objects in a screen In total you can place 64 instruments or objects on a screen Most of the instruments can be repeated on a screen So it is no problem if you decide to place 10 bar graphs 5 line graphs and 3 text controls on a single screen There are some exceptions though Object Instrument restrictions The following objects instruments
131. artifacting filtered EEG signals it is recommended to use FIR based filters FIR disadvantages A FIR needs more computations than an IIR to achieve the same effect and always introduces a fixed delay This delay or latency gets to be greater when the order of the filter defined by the number of coefficients is greater Example when a signal is sampled at 256 samples per second and an FIR filter is used that uses 128 coefficients the delay will be half the size of the coefficients thus 64 samples This equals a delay in time of 250 milliseconds BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 248 Therefore the FIR filter is more suitable for reviewing signals More coefficients will provide better filtering but also greater delays FIR filters can not compute DC offsets away as well as IIR filters In that case a DC Removal filter may be required Some frequently asked questions So what is the BEST filter The BioTrace software comes standard with default channel and filter settings which are already optimized In case you want to design your own digital filters BioTrace can show you the resulting filter characteristics while you design your filters you press the button labeled Show Frequency Response There is no best digital filter It all depends on your wish list Do you want the filter to be fast causing a small delay only or do you want the filter to be precise Do you care about ph
132. ase or not Do you filter a signal online or offline for review During review the delay is not important because you are not using the filter for client feedback On line in real time sessions the delay is important Generally we advise low order IIR filters for use in biofeedback training they are relatively fast and still provide reasonably sharp filtering For review of signals we generally advise to use FIR filters What is the difference between a digital filter and the FFT The result output of an FFT fast Fourier transform is an array of data values which are used for displaying the spectral analysis of a signal Each frequency is displayed by 1 one more bins in a histogram If you compute an FFT over 1 second of time the FFT bins will each be 1 Hz in size An example of an FFT of an EEG signal from 1 to 60 Hz is shown in the histogram below Mean 16 6Hz Median 12 0Hz Dom 9 0Hz 40 A However it will also take the FFT one complete second to compute the result and obtain the entire magnitude amplitude of that signal within the entire 1 second of data That means that generally an FFT is much slower when compared to an IIR based filter Some say that for biofeedback neurofeedback the FFT is too slow The advantage of the FFT over an IIR or FIR digital filters is that is shows an overview of all the frequencies at once Although this is always an approximation of what is going on in the EKG
133. assumes that you are familiar with the basics of physiological signals data processing and statistics For instance it will not explain to you what it means to compute the mean value of a set of data Since the user interface of the Data Channel Editor has been described in chapter 4 7 we will not repeat that information here In the following pages we will describe all data processing categories one by one BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 242 7 1 Linear Algebra Functions When you choose Linear Algebra you can choose from a number of functions Linear Algebra we Add source s0urcez Add source source Subtrack source sourcez Multiple source source Divide sourcel sourcez Average source sourcez 2 Subtract source sources tactor All these functions require that you select 2 signal sources A signal source is simply another data channel You can choose Addition The function Add sourcel source2 computes the sum of the signal values from sourcel and source2 and puts the results back in the resulting channel Note that it repeats this function for each value in the array of data values that a signal holds Result n Sourcel n Source2 n Example Source1 Source2 Result 0 1 0 1 1 2 2 2 4 3 2 5 4 3 7 5 3 8 Source1 6 4 10 E Source2 7 4 11 Result 8 5 13 9 5 14 BioTrace Manual V1 1
134. ater will become quieter Please note that BioTrace supports true dual screen mode and allows you to make any combination of primary and secondary screens BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 269 Optimal font settings For optimal display of text we advise you to select the clear type font setting as supported by Windows XP To select this double click on the desktop window and open the display properties then select the appearance tab and click on the Effects button A new dialog box will open where you can select the smoothing of the font Select the ClearType as shown in the example below qee Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Inactive Window fM alx Active Window DER Message Box x Use the following transition effect for menus and tooltips Fade effect v Use the following method to smooth edges of screen fonts ClearType v C Use large icons Show shadows under menus Show window contents while dragging Windows and buttons a Windows XP styl Paama a a Hide underlined letters for keyboard navigation until I press the Alt key Color scheme Default blue Font size 8 2 Configuring your computer for Sound Because BioTrace support features such as video and sound capture fully synchronized with the physiological data but also DVD and CD audio playback MIDI sounds and digitized sound feedback the sound capab
135. be visible in the HRV frequency analysis around the 0 1 Hz equals 10 seconds per cycle BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 261 7 4 Frequency Analysis Functions These functions are based on spectral analysis FFT You can choose from the following functions Category of data processing Frequency Analysis FFT v Type of computation Bandpass Power v Subtype or Parameter Bandpass Amplitude Power of Bandpass Bandpass Power Median Frequency Dominant Frequency Mean Freguenc When computing spectral analysis using an FFT fast Fourier transformation the result will usually be an array of bins for each frequency which indicate the power or magnitude of the signal at that frequency An example for the EEG is shown below AC EEG1 raw 1 F I 10 0 Band pass Amplitude This function computes the amplitude magnitude of a signal in the given band width Band pass results in pk pk An example for the Alpha band is shown below Note in this case the band pass amplitude is comparable to the RMS amplitude computed on the Alpha band units in microvolt pk pk But yet the results will be different because of the spectral leaking of the FFT and the fact that the epoch of the FFT 1 or 2 seconds is far greater than the epoch of the Alpha RMS 1 8 of a second BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 262 An example of the Alpha FFT band pass amplitude setting
136. can only be used once on the primary or secondary screen The Video and Audio capture The DVD replay instrument The Direct X plug in instrument Only 1 instance may exist at any time BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 168 5 4 Screen Instruments Instruments the Bargraph The first object on the toolbar is the Bargraph This is a multi purpose instrument capable of displaying 1 channel It supports most of the standard instruments features including biofeedback The Instrument specific display options can be found under the option Display Options amp Ranges tanen to data dene Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds One of these options is the Instrument Style of the instrument which can be set to 3D Style or Classical Bargraph Data TypeStats Current ACTUAL data value s Instrument Style 30 Style Eargraph Display options 1 30 Style Bargraph Classical Bargraph Display options 2 You change the threshold on this instrument by left clicking in the part where the bar is drawn and moving the mouse up and down BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 169 The and button increase and decrease the scale the F button fits the range to the signal being displayed Instruments the Singl
137. capture object will show a preview of the video Note sometimes you may observe some dropped frames in the preview window However this does not always mean that the frames are lost in the session BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 209 Video Capture Settings When you right click the video capture object you will see the property menu Background amp Borders Font Settings Capture Settings Close f Choose the option Capture Settings Then the following dialog box will be shown where you can configure the video capture Video and Audio Capture Settings Select VIDEO device Select Quality Select AUDIO device Realtek ACO Audio Please select the Capture device s you want to use for recording synchronized audio and or video The quality is defined by the level of compression Higher bit ates provide higher quality but also take up more space on your hard disk You can set the following properties 1 The Video Device attach the video camera or webcam to your computer and make sure the drivers have been installed properly Then select the device from this list Best is to connect the video camera before you startup the BioTrace application 2 Video Quality this property defines how good the image quality will be WMV 384 Khits second WMV 768 Kbits second AVI No Audio AVI With Audio WMA Audio onl 3 Audio Device normally when you use a webcam t
138. change the band from 4 8 Hz to 4 7 5 Hz the trend report will recompute all sessions and base the Theta statistics on these new band pass parameters In the same fashion you could add a new data channel for instance the ratio of the Gamma and Alpha amplitudes and generate a trend report on this new data channel Please note Remember BioTrace always stores the plain raw data that was recorded from it s sensors From that raw data all kinds of data channels can be derived Since you are always free to build new data channels this enables you to look at trend your sessions in new ways even years after they have been recorded V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 89 Trend Reports graphic output options When you view a previously generated report or view a newly generated report you will be presented with a dialog box where you can select the graphic formatting of the trend report This is also the place where you manually enter the range of the Y Scales that are used in the trend report When you trend a channel like HR the values will be different from those of Temperature or EMG levels So y scale range settings will need to be set differently Trend Report Graphic Format Select the FORMAT of print out for the trend report in the listbox below Then press OK to continue or Cancel to exit I F TELEL 2 Print individual linegraphs The
139. cond the mean level and the last the maximum level of the last 15 seconds During a session recording or replay it takes 15 seconds before these data values appear You can change these settings under the Display Options amp Ranges right of the Data Type Stats option BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 186 at ACTUAL data valu ACTUAL data value MIN statistic MAs statistic _ MEAN statistic STODEYV statistic Coeff of Variablity Amplitude AM See 32 Session MIN statistic Session MAS statistic Session MEAN statistic Session STODEW statistic Session Coeff of Varablity Session Amplitude AM Se2 628 16 Sec Basic Statistics Session Basic Statistics Show the REWARD counter A special case of these statistics is the 15 Sec Amplitude RMSx2 82 This option can be used to measure the peak peak level of variability of a signal This is particularly useful for displaying the level of heart rate variability online In the example below the first numerical instrument on the left uses this specific setting 16 Sec Amplitude AM Se2 62 HRV HF o Current HR 88 90 85 34 Effectively this displays the distance or difference between HRmax and HRmin within the last 15 second cycle This statistic reflects the HR variability very well The advantage of this method is that is continuously updates the HRV rather than once every cycle of 10 15 seconds like the older H
140. count animation frames Dieplay count animation cycles You may use these as a form of reward to the client BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 218 The Animation Instrument The Animation Instrument can be connected to a data channel directly but much more often you will use it where it is driven by threshold states of other instruments This requires linking the animation to another instrument An example is where an animation of a sunset sunrise is linked to a bargraph that displays temperature The animation can now be made to play in one or the other direction when the temperature is above or below threshold in the bargraph Right click the animation and choose Link to Instrument Select Animation Connect to data channe Edit data channel Link to Instrument Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Text s Close This will bring up the following dialog box EJ her instrument TUUUUSUNNOUETOUETOUIAY LINK to input from anot O By LINKING to another instrument you can use its THRESHOLD or RANGE based state to drive an animation or show statistics l Bargraph lt Sensor E SCiGSR gt 2 4nimation Instrument lt Sensor E SC G5R gt StLinegraph with 1 Y scale lt Sensor E SCMG5SR gt This is a secondary screen get LINK From PRIMARY screen Link to THRESHOLD state C Link to RANGE based state In this dialog box you need to select 1 i
141. ct the ENTER TEXT option to change the text of this object TEXT entry and settings Text alignment Inset all edges Multiple lines center text hone 10 0 Multiline text contents The temperature at your finger tip normally is between 30 and 36 degrees Celsius During Vasodilation expansion of your bloodvessels skin temperature in the extremities usually increases Use FADE_IN effect C Display HELP text in here You can change the text properties in this dialog box and confirm them by pressing the OK button After that press the E key to refresh and rebuild the screen This dialog box offers you several text alignment and text inset options just like the ones that are used in DTP desktop publishing applications Feel free to experiment with them When you are done we will save the screen Go out of the edit mode and select the Save Screen As option from the menu bar Screen Configuration Help Build Mew Screen Save Screen Chrl 5 Save Screen AS Load a Screen Load Session open Database Save channel SET as Load channel SET Frink Ctrl F Print Preview Print Setup Export Session Data Exit In the screen selector box click the Add New category button and Type in your own category description like My Own Screens Then click the Save this screen button and type in the name of the screen After saving the screen it will appear as a small thumbnail image in the
142. d Drive Select the SENSORS that should be used for FLASH sessions Input D EMG raw Input E SC GSR Input F Temp Input G BYP Input H RSP Input I Oximetry 5pO02 Input J Oximetry pulse Available Recording Time OOh 00m 00s Recordings on Card Feedback Threshold level Clear Card Cancel BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 90 You select highlight the sensors that you want to store on the flash card Remember that all other data channels derived from the sensors are computed by the software In the example shown above only channels from input E F G and H are selected These will be saved on the flash card using the sample rates that were set earlier in the sensor input and sample rate configuration The steps are 1 Select the correct flash card drive the software will try to locate this drive automatically 2 Select highlight the sensors you want to store 3 Press the Configure button to save the configuration 4 A message should appear that affirms the flash card has been configured 5 The dialog box will close Tf you aren t sure which drive letter to choose insert the flash card into your computer and use the windows explorer to check the available drives If you have previously initialized the flash card for use with NeXus it should have a number of SMP and INP files on it This dialog box will also show you the available recording time tha
143. d N counts OR logical AND OR 36 EMG 1 ampl N A logical AND OR Note channel values are the statistical MEAN of the last 15 seconds You can combine up to 2 Boolean criteria with a logical AND or OR function Other options are 1 The screen has been shown for certain time N seconds 2 The session has run for a certain time N seconds 3 The trial counter has reached a certain level The trial counter can be incremented by this or other buttons It starts at O at the beginning of a new session Note when you choose criteria based on the channel data physiological signals please note that this channel value will not be the current data value but rather it will be the mean value of this data channel over the last 15 seconds BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 207 Automatic Segments Markers and the Trial Counter When a button is clicked or auto clicked by a criterion you can define a number of click actions 1 Generate an EVENT marker 2 Create anew SEGMENT 3 Increment the TRIAL counter An example of these settings is shown below When dicked do the following Create an EVENT marker Enter text Create anew SEGMENT Enter type In this example at the time the button is clicked this screen will create an Event Marker with the text description of Start It will also create a new segment of the type Baseline and it will increment the
144. d flow A Alpha amplitude Blood Flow Vasodilation The Biofeedback and Display options are very similar to those of the Bargraph so we refer you to the description of the Bargraph for those The Display Option that is specific for the Zoomer Instrument is the Instrument Style Display Options and Range Settings Y acale RANGE 0 00 25 00 Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment Auto FIT to MIN MA Auto FIT to D M Auto CENTER maintain range FFT Frequency range FFT Epoch size Show FFT statistics Smoothing Data Type S tats Curent ACTUAL data value Instrument Style Rectangle oomer Display options 1 Rectangle Zoomer Display options 2 Instruments the Animation Instrument The 15th object on the toolbar is the Animation Instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 192 This instrument uses an animated series of images bitmap or jpg file that start in one position and end in another When the bitmaps are played in sequence backwards or forwards usually objects showed in the animation change move expand etc Below an example is shown of an animation of a Sun set Sun rise where the sun will rise when the hand temperature rises E BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt Hand Temperature training 1 screen gt Client lt John Sample gt File Scree
145. d the default set However if you make changes to a channel set or create a new channel set you can save this set under a new name Use the option Save channel SET as see below S BioTrace Software for NeXus 1 Screen Configuration Help Build New Screen Save Screen Cirl 5 Save Screen As Load a Screen L Open Session Database 0 Save channel SET as Load channel SET Print Print Preview Print Setup Export Session Data Exit Ctrl P The best way to create a new channel set is starting with a given set modify it and then save it under a new name Loading Channel Sets amp Attaching them to a new Screen If you want to load a channel set use the following option under the File menu Biolrace Software for NeXus 1 Screen Configuration Help Build New Screen Save Screen Ctrl 5 Save Screen As Load a Screen L Open Session Database 0 Save channel SET as Load channel SET Print Print Preview Print Setup Export Session Data Exit BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Ctrl P Page 96 Any time you choose this option the computer will ask you if you want to attach this channel set to the current screen Do you want to ATTACH this data channel set to the current screen Doing so will load the channel set automatically next time this screen is loaded So what does attaching a channel set
146. data as having a certain meaning Example imagine a session with a 5 minute baseline 5 minute of different types of stressors and 5 minutes of relaxation If you want to compare the results from the different segments you need to mark these segments and compare the data BioTrace can compute statistics for each type of segment separately Computing statistics on multiple segments f yy my aor ese veers E VV V Event a segment options Analysis Functions Recompute Session Overview Compute Statistics on entre session F Artifact Rejection P Size of TIME axis b Close If multiple segment types exist just right click the overview screen without selecting any data and choose the option Compute Statistics gt On all segments BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 114 The session statistics box will show up but now with the basic statistics for each type of segment Note 1f multiple segments of a certain segment TYPE say stressor exist BioTrace will summarize the statistics for all these segments in a single set of Statistical results Adding Segments Automatically BioTrace can add or generate segments automatically through protocols This is not a function you can access in the session overview mode When a protocol is running displaying one screen after the other in a certain sequence and with a given timi
147. device usually the soundcard that connects to your audio source Usually a microphone The Audio quality defines the quality of the sounds Low MONO quality is sufficient for basic voice sounds It produces the smallest files Medium is a good general purpose setting and produces very good results for voice recordings CD quality is best when recording music or very high quality voice In all cases the voice files are compressed on the fly and stored in an MP3 WMA compatible format Note you can NOT combine this audio Capture object with Video Capture Video Capture already captures the sounds microphone including the video signals BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 211 Objects the DVD Object The 22nd object on the toolbar is the DVD replay Object This objects replays video rather like the Video Objects replays video from stored video files The difference is that the video source this time comes from a DVD disk which has to be put inside the drive before the video can be replayed You can only play 1 DVD video object on the primary or secondary screen The DVD video will only play when a session is running Replaying or recording The Inhibit state will temporarily pause the DVD video unless you uncheck the Pause VIDEO during Inhibit option Background amp Borders se VIDEO during INHIBIT w Pau When you t
148. ds means 0 5 second interbeat interval equals 500 ms Please note that no absolute or fixed criteria exist for defining what IBI values are artifacts and which are not The HRV statistics use NN intervals that are based on de artifacted HR data You define what artifacts are and what are not Henceforth the Statistics that the software computes are impacted by your definition of what artifacts are The automatic removal is only a tool for supporting you in de artifacting the IBI data Tip if you are doing research you can export the IBI table and compare the de artifacted results of BioTrace with other HRV software applications It may take some tweaking and tuning to get the best results BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 125 Printing a HRV quick report Press the button labeled Print in the HRV statistics dialog box to show a preview of the HRV statistics report An example of such a report is shown below Actual screen display may vary Bio Tracet Physiological Date Stansocs Report Version 1 0 Concise Client and Session information Client John Sample ID 000076 Session Sample session with byp tmp 5c rsp temp Date Time 12 46 20 15 06 2004 Duration 5min 1sec Heart Rate Variability Analysis HRV channel 33 HR BVP 125 Samples Sec Graphical overview of the RR Intervals IBI table HRY Statistical Results Statistic Unit NNMin ms NNMax ms NNMean ms SDNN ms R
149. e Connect to data channel Edit data channel tae Link to Instrument SR a Reale Te a er Color Settings eh i i ai a a a Background amp Borders i i Display Options amp Ranges aR a oy a an Title Text s Sr ee AAT Font Settings Close Delete Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V MIKE PSS V EN 00 04 00 06 00 08 00 10 LT a Pl 0014 16 00 18 00 20 00 22 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 216 This will place the object on the screen In case the object is an instrument capable of displaying signals the software will show you a list of the current data channels that you can connect the instrument to After that you will need to set all the other parameters such as colors background etc Another way to create a new object is to use an existing object and simply copy it The copy will have the exact same size and properties as the original So in case you want to put a number of similar size instruments bar graphs linegraphs etc on screen you can use this option To use it Right click the object you want to copy choose Copy Now right click the object again and choose Paste This will now create a copy of the object at the same position but with a slight offset Deleting Objects You can delete an object by right clicking the object and shooing Delete Alternatively you can also simply point the mouse over the object in screen editor mode
150. e screen that contains preset backgrounds colors and instruments Such a template screen would also be connected to a channel set of your choice The second method building from scratch involves more work but gets you there just as well Let s summarize what screen building involves enter the screen editor mode by pressing E on the keyboard place objects and instruments on the screen canvas load and attach the specific channel set that you want to use otherwise the default channel set is usually loaded anyway connect instruments to data channels or link them to other instruments set the feedback properties of the instruments and the set the inhibits define the contents of your other objects texts images backgrounds etc switch to the session overview mode by pressing the Tab key define which channels you want to see in the overview mode and choose the display type line graphs bar graphs switch back to the real time screen mode press Tab save the screen you just built 6 1 Basic Principles Placing objects and using Copy and Paste Switch to the editor press E and left click in the toolbar to select an object Then move your mouse to the screen canvas and left click again Object Toolbar Sys ney wie uae PPPS Meron ney ete ige Gon Ui oun rey manip imme S S acre ry ue ous ba OR Onn OMMEE S ue Neth Unwell yet ior OM my ood Me ML wie EE crt gente Mots nike a ma
151. e 6 0 Use the buttons to decrease increase o OS Pacer parameters In the pacer dialog box you can set the following parameters 1 T1 The time it takes to go from baseline 0 to the maximum inhalation You enter this time in milliseconds 2 T2 the time the signal will be sustained hold at maximum 3 T3 the time the signal will drop from maximum to baseline minimum 4 T4 The pause time in between this and the next cycle During a session recording you can press the and key in order to speed up or slow down the pacer Else you can use this dialog box to change the parameters while the session is running V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 56 An example of a Pacer screen is shown below The bargraph at the left displays the pacer signal whereas the second bargraph shows the actual respiration signal Follow the Pacer Signal on the left and inhale amp exhale slowly in the same pace PACER SIGNAL RESPIRATION i Jaat ET ai a ii a E RET Mie oieta ji z ai RT ae ei ae ee At 00 06 00 08 00 40 00 42 00 14 00 16 00 183 00 20 y Please note the pacer actually behaves like a virtual sensor signal This pacer signal is displayed and stored in the session files as 1f it were a data channel The advantage is that you can review replay the pacer signal along with the respiration and heart rate or other signals and
152. e v Enabled Enable the threshold color change and set the color change item to orange This will now cause the color of the bargraph to change from green to orange when the signal goes over threshold That s it You have now changed the color of the bargraph and enabled a color change when the level goes over threshold Overview of Instrument properties As mentioned before there are two types of objects on the screen 1 Instruments that display physiological data 2 Screen Objects that display images texts video etc The instruments have more properties than the screen objects because they display physiological data So this means they connect to a data channel support biofeedback options etc Not all instruments support the same features For instance some instruments do not support thresholds amp biofeedback Note you can change most object properties in real time screen mode and edit mode Except for size and position These can only be accessed in the screen editor mode Let look at all the different options Instrument connecting a data channel Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close All instruments must be connected to 1 or more data channel s For instance if there is a bargraph on your screen it must know what data s
153. e Y Scale Line graph The 2nd object on the toolbar is the Single Y Scale Line graph This is a multi purpose instrument capable of displaying of up to 4 channels simultaneously In case more than channel is connected please make sure all channels are using the same units or have the same modality Explanation it is fine to combine 1 4 EMG amplitudes EEG signals Theta Alpha Beta but you should for instance not combine temperature and _ heart rate on a single Y Scale line graph The units and ranges of Skin Temperature and heart rate are just too different Therefore you would never get a good resolution on both channels at the same time If the range would be good for the heart rate e g 50 100 beats per minute the temperature would show almost as a flat line For such a combination of channels you would be better off choosing the dual Y Scale Line graph instrument This instrument supports most of the standard instruments features including audio feedback options and inhibits The instrument can be used to display fast 2048 SPS and slow signals 32 SPS The maximum time range the line graph instrument can display is about 50 seconds The picture below shows an example of this instrument connected to 1 raw EEG signal top At the bottom the same instrument is now connected to 4 channels of EEG band pass filtered activity Theta Alpha SMR and Beta Raw EEG Signal ft A AN R mf i Si em Ae gt U 00 04 00
154. e drop down menus that appear when you right click an object You click with the button on the right side of your mouse Properties of Instruments amp Objects A Alpha amplitude 155 82 8 Edit data channel Link to Instrument a ar Color Settings ASMR am Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Textis Font Settings Close If you right click an instrument or object on a screen you will see a drop down menu that allow you to view and change all the properties of that instrument For instance the data channel it 1s connected to Properties of the screen Set Background Colors Set Background Sound Show Screen Notes N Close The same applies to screens right clicking them will for instance show the background settings for that screen In the session overview you can set the display properties of the data channels Properties of scales in the session overview mode Select channel s Linegraph Linegraph with markers Bargraph 2D H Display Type V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 67 4 4 The Screen Browser The screen browser is the place where you load save and select screens The quickest way to access it is by pressing the L key on your keyboard for Load a screen Screen browser LOADING a new screen Select a screen CATE GORY Select a SCREEN from thumbnail image list below i D ouble clicking on a
155. e line centre text in the midd Single tine right align test Text Inset The Inset defines how much space there is around the edges of the text 10 can be used as a good default Text Scaling Please note that all text instruments and objects are scaled to the size of the monitor they are displayed on That means that a screen will adapt the size of the object such that the screen fits on a 1024x768 as well as on a 1280x1024 monitor The size of the Font of the text will be scaled as well Fade IN effect The fade in effect will initially display the text in black and then slowly fade in the text to the color that you have selected under the FONT options Display HELP text This option will tell a text object that it should display the help text of buttons on the screen when the mouse moves over these buttons You define this help text under the properties of a Button Object A sample is shown below Help text of button will be shown here Text Object Select the START button to begin with an wees 6 asy point amp cick protocol Background amp Borders Y P p Enter Text A a Enter HEP text Protocols provide a standardized way of Fank Ses using your Bio feedback system They Futon Iencne guide you step by step and can START and Button Acton STOP sessions automatically The help text is basically an instruction to the user telling him what the button will do when it i
156. e listed When you select one of these clients the sessions present in the old database will appear on the right V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 76 Select one or more of the sessions and then press the IMPORT selected Session s button When the import function has ended a message box will appear indicating the session files have been converted and copied Import Single Sessions from BioTrace BioGraph MultiT race Through this dialogbox you can import sessions from MultiTrace and compatible software Select the DATA subdirectory the dient directory and then the conseqgutive sessions you want to import Importing may take up to several minutes per session Enter the PATH of the DATA directory below C Biograph Pata Ready Old Database Sele pass 4 x EMG Kopf ond PEA 2000 10 24 EEG Impuls When you return to the session database dialog box you will see the session file s that you have added listed under the currently selected client You can now view the session data in the currently loaded screen Choose the Exit button to leave the import function However the session overview data still has to be generated So when you switch to the session overview screen the software will ask you if you want to generate the overview data This imported session does not yet have overview data Do you want me to generate this data now After you have selected
157. e not for sale we can not include these video files with BioTrace Fortunately it is very easy to download such video files and add them to BioTrace The following video file formats are supported AVI MPG mpeg WMV ASF Divx only works when the Divx encoder has been installed When you download the video files from Internet or copy them from a CD or DVD that contains video files you should copy the file s to the BioTrace Video directory An example of this video directory is shown below File Edit View Favorites Tools Help r A rton Antyre Fi Qm gt 3 A Search j Folders E Uhia AntiVirus fo F Name Size A Video Tasks lRabbit1 wmv 7 748 JRabbit2 wmv 17 970 gt Play all Thumbs db 21KB a Copy all items to CD File and Folder Tasks a Make a new folder es Publish this folder to the Web E3 Share this folder Video used for feedback purposes The Video object by default responds to the inhibit state So if any instrument sets the inhibit the video will be paused You can switch this option off so that the video file will always play even if there are inhibits To do this right click the video object and un check the Pause VIDEO during Inhibit option Selecting this option again will put back the check mark BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 198 Objects the Text Object The 17th object on the toolbar is the Text Object This object does
158. e of a signal Example the level of EMG can be used to control the Volume of an MP3 songs that is played by BioTrace Inhibits are another form of digital feedback except that they are able to turn things OFF Important to know is that you can add as many inhibits to a screen as you like Usually you will put Inhibits mostly on your Master Clinician screen Inhibits switch tone feedback videos DVD s etc off while playing When there are no inhibits active those will normally play Example you can use multiple Inhibits on instruments to turn off a DVD However when none of the Inhibits are active the DVD will play So for instance you may have an EMG inhibit combined with a Theta Inhibit and Eye Blink Inhibit When any of those occur for instance Theta is over a threshold of 10 microvolt the DVD move will stop Session Overview Settings Remember that the screen that you are building always has the overview mode built in When you pres tab to switch to that mode you should manually add the channels you want to visualize on the overview mode Saving the screen When you are done creating a screen you should save it by choosing either Save Screen or Save Screen As Biol race Software for NeXus 1 aa Screen Configuration Help Build New Screen Save Screen Ctrl 5 Save Screen As Save Screen will overwrite the existing screen Save as will create a new screen
159. e primary monitor and the secondary screen will be shown on the secondary monitor You can create shortcuts for loading screens by using the functions keys F1 F12 By pressing them a screen will be loaded in the primary screen By pressing the CONTROL key at the same time those same screens will be shown in the secondary monitor You can use these keys on the fly and quickly switch between screens We will explain this in depth in the shortcuts chapter The PRIMARY screen is where you have all options to your disposal You create and edit your screens here you control the session select clients etc The PRIMARY screen could also be called the master screen This is where you change all settings and control everything The SECONDARY screen could be called a slave screen It is controlled from the primary screen and its main purpose is to show training screens to the client You can not edit the secondary screen like you can in the primary screen but you can make changes there and even save those changes from its menu bar A sample of a dual screen setup is shown below Primary screen Secondary screen In this setup the primary screen is used to observe the raw EEG signal as well as a variety of parameters in the EEG The secondary screen observed by the client on the right only displays the digital water effect and a bargraph When the client decreases the level of Theta amplitude the ripples on the water will disappear and thus the w
160. e read the Following license agreement carefully ETE MICRO STAR INT L cO LTD OMsI IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE ACCOMPANYING THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS IN THIS AGREEMENMWT PLEASE DO NOT USE OR LOAD THIS SOFTWARE AND ANY ASSOCLATED MATERIALS COLLECTIVELY THE SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BY LOADING OR USING THE gt Ido not accept the terms in the license agreement Installshield lt Back Cancel Continue pressing NEXT until you are shown the following dialog box j MSI Bluetooth Software 1 3 1 InstallShield Wizard Ioj x Installing MSI Bluetooth Software tee w The program Features you selected are being installed T aa L3 Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs MSI Bluetooth Software This may take several minutes Status Placing My Bluetooth Places on the Desktop vour Bluetooth device is plugged in properly and click OK to continue installation Click Cancel bo continue installation without the Bluetooth device OK Cancel T Mo Bluetooth device was detected Please make sure that After this dialog box has popped up put the MSI Bluetooth PC2PC in a free USB port From now on we advise you to always use this same USB port for the Bluetooth PC2PC stick so you may want to make a note which USB port
161. e recommended that you get a good graphics accelerator card such as from NVIDIA or ATI Get the latest drivers from the Internet 2 Use 24 bit or 32 bit true color modes 3 Make sure the card supports dual screen mode 4 For the primary screen we advise a high resolution 1024x768 is the absolute minimum better is 1280x 1024 5 For the secondary screen 800x600 is the minimum Better is 1024x768 6 Install the latest version of DirectX We advise version 9 0C or newer 7 We advise to use a 17 Inch or greater flat screen monitor for the primary screen A fast response time less than 20 ms is nice to have Note DVD Video or animations need more processing power on the secondary screen than on the primary screen If you plan to use them extensively you have an extra reason to get a good graphics card Notebooks and graphic cards Most notebooks support dual monitors However the graphics on notebooks are usually slower than on desktop computers An accelerator card is a must have on a notebook or the BioTrace graphics may not be optimal particularly on the secondary monitor Nowadays almost all computers even standard computers are supplied with fast graphics cards BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 268 Primary and secondary screens You may already have noticed that in the screen browser box that you can select screens as PRIMARY Screen and as SECONDARY Screen The primary screen will be shown on th
162. e saved when you save the screen BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 163 Screen background sound Right click the screen background and choose Set Background Sound from the drop down menu Set Background Colors Set Background Sound Show Screen Notes N Close Next the following dialog box will appear Digital Sound amp Song Feedback settings for WAV MP3 and WMA files List of Selected Media to play Available Media Files WATERFL WAV Applause 2 wav BIRDS 1 WAV Boing L waw FunnyCar toon wav FunnyMusic 1 wav FunnyMusic2 wav FunnyWhiste wav Harp i wav Harp2 wav Harp3 wav OCEAN WAV RAIN LWAY stressors wav WATERFL WAV _ Play List in random order Generally you choose a single sound file here that will be played instantly when the screen 1s loaded This way you can for instance attach a spoken voice instruction to a screen when it is shown Or you can start some background music The Loop Songs option will replay the sound for as long as the screen is shown When the next screen is loaded the background music sound will stop BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 164 Screen screen notes Right click the screen background and choose Show Screen Notes Set Background Colors Set Background Sound Show Screen Notes N Close This will bring up an information box containing text that describes the function of the
163. e shown in PAUSE mode You will need to un pause the session manually for the protocol to continue Advantages of the sequence based protocol You can exactly define the duration of screens and when they will be shown The screen sequence is always the same You can loop a sequence repeat it X times Disadvantages You can not navigate away from a sequence It will keep running in the background and always play the next screen slide unless you load another script that overrides it or stop the session You can t set conditions that define when and how the next screen will be shown buttons actions can do this So practically you will normally use a combination of button based screens that you can use create a menu of your protocol and which can navigate and one or more sequence scripts that will be launched by another button Note you may create a series of small scripted sequences and launch those with the buttons in your protocol screens Making protocols available to others When making protocols available to others we advise you ZIP all the files right click files and choose send to compressed zipped folder in Windows Explorer We advise you to do this by copying through windows explorer all the screens images scripts etc to a temporary folder where you have created the same directories so for instance protocoll screens protocol1 protocols protocoll audio etc Then fill those directo
164. e that is greater than 30 BPM as compared to the last detected beat You do not have to select this However this is no guarantee that all IBI data is free of artifacts 2 The IBI table can reject beats IBI values in segments that you define as being artifact areas you have to select this 3 The IBI table can reject beats IBI values in segments of the session that fulfill certain automatic artifact criteria you have to select this You can check or uncheck the check mark that says Remove Artifacts in order to set or clear the artifact removal Press the button Recompute table to recompute the IBI using the current new artifact settings Note visual inspection of the IBI table and the original source signal such as the BVP or ECG always remains necessary in order to make sure the IBI tables contains as little artifacts as possible However even after artifacting the IBI table may and probably will still contain an unknown number of artifacts BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 123 Definition of Artifact Criteria Click the button labeled Set Artifact Criteria to open the dialog box where you can define how the software should filter the IBI table The following box appears Heartrate IBI Artifact Removal Criteria In this dialog box you define criteria for REMOVAL of artifacts from the computed IBI TABLE Artifacts can have a significant impact on H
165. ect a data channel to the instrument Select channel 36 EMG1 Amplitude After that press the O key on your keyboard to open the session database Load the 2xEMG session from John Sample double click on the date Column so we will be able to display some data Now we will need to size the instrument a little Click in the right bottom handle and size the instrument by dragging the black handle BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 222 ane to data channel J Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close Delete Copy Ctl c Paste Ctrl V After sizing the instrument right click it and select the Feedback Options amp Thresholds In the dialog box that pops up we will now select a feedback tone when the level is Above the threshold that we will set Choose Midi Tone feedback Biofeedback and Threshold Settings ABOVE Threshold No feedback No feedback Inhibit all feedback Required TIME above FREINER a __ Midi Song feedback CD Audio feedback IN BETWEEN Increment Reward Counter Digitized Sound WAV MPF 3 Required TIME between millisacorids Then click the Edit button shown just below the selection you just made Midi Tone feedback wt Edit
166. edback is the INHIBIT which pauses feedback One or more instruments on the primary or secondary screen can trigger an inhibit state when a certain level has been reached Too high or too low The inhibit state 1s state that is set for the entire application and effectively used to turn things off This means that when an inhibit state occurs other feedback whether it is audio music or sounds that are playing or visual DVD Video or animations will be temporarily paused No matter what screen is playing the feedback V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 53 Example an instrument on the primary screen connected to EMG with a given threshold at 10 microvolts AND with a feedback setting that it should inhibit all feedback when above this threshold will turn off pause one or more instruments on the primary amp secondary screen that are currently playing sound or video An example of an instrument setting of Inhibit above threshold is shown below Biofeedback and Threshold Settings Inhibit all feedback w Required TIME below o a Threshold 1 Level C Auto Threshold 1 _ ON for first minutes Speers 4 TIME above TH1 Threshold 2 Level 0 00 Enable Threshold 2 t Enable Biofeedback Ignore Inhibit All OK f ance You can get here by right clicking on an instrument and choosing Feedback Options amp Thresholds see drop down menu below Connect to da
167. edia B V 2004 2011 Page 71 In this dialog box you enter the basic client information The minimum you should enter are the LAST NAME the FIRST NAME the CLIENT ID Note The CLIENT ID is automatically generated by the computer so you can use that ID if you like or fill in a special ID number according to your own system Delete Client Edit Client Information Delete Client Add Client Click this button on your keyboard to delete the currently selected client Be aware though that by deleting a client all the client information including all the sessions will be deleted Add Client Click this button to add a new client to the database Please note that the minimal data you need to input on a new client are the first and last name The software will generate a client ID You may override this ID and replace it by another text V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page T2 Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report Clinical Management Delete Session Import FLASH Session Import PC Session After a session has been created you can enter session notes comments through a database dialog box Edit Session Notes Procedure Description lt Session Procedure Description gt This is a multimodal sample session that you can use to test sceens and functions of BioTrace Canal Clinical Management Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report Clinical Management De
168. eeecceeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeess 191 Instruments the Animation Instrument cccccccccecccceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeaeeesseeeeeees 192 Adding your own animations to BioTrace t essssssssooeressssssssserresssssssseeeeee 195 Did DCKECM ODJECE iS naasar a aara 197 Objects the Video Replay ODJECE iroa a E AR 197 Adding Video files to BioTrace ssseeeeesssssssseeeressssssssecressssssssecreessssssseeeeees 198 Objects the Text O DiCCh unsrer a E sentaiadieaednusivounias 199 OD jects the Tage OD CC eero aa ES 202 Addins Images Files to Bio I taced siaitecc aces i harsdaerec shale aten uM tarsiaiiens 203 Objects the Buton Control ODjeCteenaniser ione 204 Programming Button ACTIONS ccceeecsccccccccccsessseeccecceeeaeaesseeeeeeeeeeesaeesseeeeeess 205 Objects the Video Capture ODjeCtisre menaira a a 209 Vidco Capire DCMES drear tment an rs Negri tan E ns easier a err sa a 210 Objects the Audio Capture Object ica cence ech ke lace ial aa aa eects 211 Objects the DVD OB EC sri a aniein ee eietaneias 212 Objecis the Game ODJ EC irase EEE 213 Objects the Plash AmiunavionODj6Cl sists sssciaceiiah tes ndecedeliniated niviniei eb tetindeeadel 215 6 0 Building and Creating new SCLeONS cccccccccccccccccccscccccccscccscssesscsscsssessseseeeeeees 216 6 1 Basic Principles coreean aeae a ai 216 Placing objects and using Copy and Paste cccccccccccccessseeeseeeceeeeeesaeeseeeeeees 216 Deleting ODI CCtS einn a aS 217
169. een Note In case you want to read more on optimization and configuration of your computer for the use of BioTrace we advise you to read chapter 8 at the end of this manual V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 9 1 2 Step 2 Start the Quick Start Menu To install or update the BioTrace software you need the supplied BioTrace Setup CD Enter the CD in your CD or DVD drive and wait for the quick start menu to appear In case your computer has not been configured to auto start software from CD DVD you need to start the menu manually You can do this by double clicking the BioTraceQuickStartMenu exe shown below in the contents of your CD DVD My Disc Ez File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qa O A LO search fy Folders Address 24 E Files Currently on the CD CD Writing Tasks ci J Write these files to CD K BlueTooth XP 5P2 Drivers File and Folder Tasks gt al M Media eS Publish this folder to the Web E3 Share this folder autorun inf Setup Information KB Other Places Bio TraceQuickStartMenu exe Camtasia MenuMaker Player ig My Computer TechSmith Corporation G My Document o Shared Documents J My Network Places Please note actual screen display of the content of your CD DVD may be different on your computer When the quick start menu has been launched a dialog box will appear that shows a number of software installation options V20
170. een all the filter characteristics Both filters have advantages and disadvantages The main ones are listed below IIR advantages The UR filters require relatively few memory locations and calculations compared to FIR filters in order to achieve the same result This means that is some cases depending on the order of the filter they are faster than FIR based filters IIR filters are usually the best choice for biofeedback neurofeedback purposes An IIR filter can cope very well with high DC offsets a high pass or band pass HR filter will compute the DC offset away IIR disadvantages The HR filters introduce non linear phase characteristics That means that the waveform of a signal like the EEG will look different than the original when looking at the same frequencies So an IIR filter introduces distortions in the wave form This will have little or no impact on the amplitudes in the signal So when computing the Alpha amplitude the result will nearly be the same for an IIR and for an FIR filter An IIR filter introduces a small delay which depends mostly on the order of the filter Greater orders mean greater delays and more phase distortion but better filtering FIR advantages The FIR filter has the advantage that it has a linear phase characteristic That means that the signal will not be distorted FIR filters are usually a better choice when waveforms in a filtered signal like the EEG should be recognized When de
171. een you are editing E BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt EMG EDR SC BYP Temp screen gt Client lt John Sample gt File Screen Configuration Help The 4 items listed here are File Screen Configuration and Help Now follows an overview of the menu bar and the functions you can select here The File menu items GA Screen Configuration Help Build Mew Screen Save Screen Ctrl 5 Save Screen 4s Load a Screen L Open Session Database 0 Save channel SET as Load channel SET Princ Ctrl F Print Preview Print Setup Export Session Data Exit Build New Screen This will close the current screen and switch to the screen editor where you can create a new screen You can also press the N key to activate this option Save Screen This will save the current screen under the current name It will remind you if you want to overwrite an existing screen Save Screen as This will open the screen browser so you can save the current screen under a new name Select the category where you want to save the screen into and then click the Save Screen button Load a Screen This will open the screen browser so you can Load a new screen You can also press the L key to activate this option V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 62 Open Session Database Save channel SET as Load channel SET Print Print Preview Print Setup Ex
172. en Select a screen CATEGORY Select a SCREEN from thumbnail image list below D ouble clicking on a Thumbnail will load the screen Basic Screens EEG Client Screens Ea ee ne ee E EG Master Screens Basic Skin Conductance Basic Skin Temperature Blood Yolume Pulse HA EEG Screens EMG screens Te Favorite Screens Migraine and Headache Multi Modality Screens MyScreens Respiration and HRV SCP St N 4 c Skin Conductance GSR EMG 1 channel EDG 2 channel Skin Temperature Stens Labs Biofeedback Stens Labs Neurofeedback Stress Protocol Long Stress Protocol Short Hand eade training 1 Hoana Pulse HR PERITOS EY yr na t Rename Category Rename Category Add New Category New Add New Category Load as Load as Primary Screen Load as Primary Screen Load as Load as Secondary Screen Load as Secondary Screen reen Notes Delete Screen Delete Screen Screen m BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 103 Now press the Tab Key on your keyboard to switch to the session overview mode You will now see something like this actual screen display may vary File Screen Configuration Help Sensor H RSP Max values HR VR Max values 00 00 30 i 01 30 02 02 30 03 03 30 04 04 30 05 05 30 K Eit Menu STOR RAGA CNV RRR o ET E T In the session overview mode this screen will display
173. ere is no way to restore them so we advise you to first import the sessions and verify that the data is correct before you delete them Note The first time you use the flash import function you may have to choose the correct Drive This drive letter generally is found in the range between E and I or even higher If you have correctly initialized and configured the flash card and V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 75 NeXus has stored one or more sessions on it you will see a list of sessions appear once you select the correct drive In case your computer does not yet have a built in flash card reader you can purchase one from most computer shops A flash card reader simply connects to a standard USB port Note that you can t import flash session through the Bluetooth wireless connection The reason is that reading the files directly from a flash card under a drive letter is up to 100 times faster than using the wireless connection So therefore the software only supports the import function through card reader Import PC Sessions Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report LOAD session Delete Session Import FLASH Session Import PC Session E Et O BioTrace can import session files from its 16 bit predecessors BioGraph 2 X or MultiTrace 2 X First select the appropriate client in BioTrace before you import sessions to this client Then click the Import PC ses
174. esh all required system and program files for instance because system settings have been lost or incorrect This option will take much longer to download Press EXIT to quit the program BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 215 In some cases when you run this LiveUpdate application Windows may try to block it because it thinks the program is illegally accessing the internet Choose Unblock to allow the LiveUpdate application to continue Windows Security Alert Ed To help protect your computer Windows Hrewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program Name Bio Trace Live Updater Publisher Mind Media BV Keep Blocking Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections from the Intemet or a network f you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it When should unblock a program In other cases it may happen that anti virus software such as Norton may want to block the LiveUpdate software In that case you may need to choose a similar option as the unblock option just mentioned After the LiveUpdate has finished it may sometimes be required to restart your Windows Computer In that case you may want to save whatever file you are working on first BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 276 8 6 Installing the Old Bluetooth drivers Please be advised that we recommend strongly
175. eta Wave 2A B Gamma wave 23 A Theta amplitude 24 A Alpha amplitude 29 ASMA amplitude 26 A Beta amplitude In case of the NeXus data channels 11 80 are computed data channels BioTrace computes these data channels on the fly An example is channel 16 which computes the Beta Wave by applying a digital filter to the EEG data coming from input A V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 45 So effectively BioTrace extends the amount of inputs channels that you can use for biofeedback or analysis to 80 channels Once you get to know BioTrace better you can create your own data channels and channels sets Let s look at an example The NeXus can record EEG from inputs A D but does so in a wide frequency range In fact the signals on input A have a frequency range from 0 Hz DC to about 800 Hz In most cases you only want to use a small portion of that range if you use the input for EEG For instance 2 45 Hz Sensor configuration Let s begin by looking at the sensor input definition Select this from the menu bar Fie Screen eget Help Sensor Input configuration T Channel Set configuration CC system Settings MultiMedia DVD Control M RSP HRY Pacer Settings or press I for INPUTS on your keyboard You will now see how the sensors have been allocated to the NeXus inputs This is controlled completely by the software The NeXus itself does not care which sensors y
176. etimes mean you are left with a gap The gap may impact you statistics in a way that you don t want You can choose from two options 1 Remove IBI without interpolation This factually leaves the gap in place No data is added to fill the gap 2 Replace IBI by interpolated data This will replace the bad IBI value that will be removed from the IBI table by the average of its value and the last valid value at index 1 In fact this is a solution which doesn t leave a gap but smoothes out the effect of bad IBI data BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 124 Automatic removal criteria As the last option you have to select how you want to define bad IBI values There are 3 options 1 2 3 You define a percent difference between subsequent IBI values If the difference is too big you assume the IBI data must be wrong Imagine that someones HR seems to go up within one beat from 60 to 120 beats per minute equals an IBI difference from 1000 to 500 ms This is physiologically rather unlikely so you may define here that you only accept differences up to 26 You can set an upper limit of what HR data IBI millisecond value you want to accept If you enter a value of for instance 1200 ms here it equals a HR of 50 bpm You can also set a lower limit for the HR Setting a value of 500 here would equal a heart rate of 120 beats per minute 2 beats per secon
177. ets The key concepts are 1 Display Screens 2 Data Channels 3 Sessions 4 Clients 5 Biofeedback option amp inhibit states We will now describe these concepts to you 3 1 Display Screens The software displays the acquired physiological data in screens Screens consist of display elements or objects that display a signal such as a heartbeat temperature and other signals or they display information text images video Objects that display data are called virtual instruments objects that display information are simply called screen objects You can build and edit these screens by switching to the EDIT mode and by dragging and dropping the diverse objects onto the screen This fully featured editor is a WYSIWYG editor what you see is what you get and comes standard with the BioTrace software Building or changing screens is about as easy as building a Microsoft PowerPoint business presentation Let s load a screen and then enter the EDIT mode You can load a screen via the main menu button Review Sessions and Clients or do the same through the menu bar at the top of the screen ri D Bio Trace System Screens MainMenu screen wis Screen Configuration Help Build Mew Screen Save Screen Chrl 5 Save Screen s Load a Screen Load Session fopen Database Save channel SET s Load channel SET Print Ctrl F Print Preview Frink Setup Export Session Data Exit V2011 Bio
178. evel in the EEG gets above a certain threshold for instance 10 microvolts a biofeedback driven computer game pauses and the music in the background stops playing When below threshold the game continues Analog feedback is a type of feedback where the level of a physiological signal is translated into a continuous feedback Example 3 the pitch of a tone sequence is used to reflect the level of the EMG activity When the EMG level increases the tone sequence plays upwards when decreasing the tone sequence plays downwards Example 4 a Flower animation is played in two directions forwards and backwards to indicate the level of Skin Conductance When the SC level decreases the flower opens up when the SC level increases the flower closes V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 55 3 6 The Respiration HRV Pacer The BioTrace software contains a built in PACER that can be used for pacing or training signals using a template wave form It s most common use 1s for pacing the respiration By trying to follow the pacer signal a user can for instance learn to breathe slower or breathe in a certain rhythm But it could be used to train other signals like EMG as well Respiratory PACER settings Enter the PACER time settings below in milliseconds Ti Inhale Time ms T2 Sustain Time ms T3 Exhale Time 4500 ms T4 Pause Time 1000 ms Target breaths per minut
179. example the correlation factor is very high 0 92 Note correlation may result in a value between 1 negative linear correlation 0 no correlation and 1 positive correlation Negative values may occur when signals are out of phase one signal goes up while the other signal goes down BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 254 7 4 General Signal Processing When you choose General Signal Processing you can choose from the following functions Category of data processing General Signal Processing Type of computations Amplitude AMS 32 5P5 Subtype or Farameter Ampltude WEAN 32 SFS Amplitude AMS 32 5F5 Pulse rate BYP a2 SFS Pulse rate EKG 32 SPS Respiration rate 32 SPS RMS Amplitude This function computes the root mean square of a signal unbiased corrected for DC offset This function is used for computing the amplitude or level of activity of EMG EEG BVP and other signals When computing the level of EMG amplitude usually a microvolt RMS level is used When computing the level of EEG wavebands such as Theta Alpha and Beta the same RMS function is used but the unit is converted to microvolt peak to peak This peak peak pk pk microvolt level is computed by taking the RMS and multiplying it with a factor of 2 times the square root of 2 Peak to Peak Amplitude Period of the wave po RMS Amplitude V V N FreguencyF 1 T Parameter size of epoch
180. file BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 221 6 2 Example 1 building an EMG screen We will now build a simple EMG screen from scratch Go to the main menu bar and choose Build New Screen E Biol race Software for NeXus 10 a Screen Configuration Help f Build New Screen m Save Qrroon i t Lei The software will ask you if you want to delete all current instrument objects and enter the edit mode Confirm by clicking in the OK button Now you will be asked to enter the name of the new screen and choose a screen category This is the place where your new screen will be saved Choose the EMG Screens category Now click in the editor and click in Toolbar on the Bargraph object in the upper left corner Then move the mouse to a place somewhere in the screen and click again 17 Gamma Wave 18 B Theta Wave 19 B Alpha Wave 20 B SMR Wave 21 B Beta Wave 22 B Gamma wave 23 Theta amplitude 24 A Alpha amplitude 25 amp SMA amplitude 26 4 Beta amplitude 27 A Gamma amplitude 28 B Theta amplitude 29 B Alpha amplitude 30 B SMA amplitude 31 B Beta amplitude 32 B Gamma amplitude 33 HRA BYP 34 EMG1 1aw 35 EMG2 raw 37 EMG2 Ampl 38 EMG1 EMG2 39 EMG1 EMG2 40 BYP amplitude 41 Ay DC EEG 42 SCP AD ACHAT Arkikank v Select 1 data channel Ea gt SREE ooroo AK TE E TT Next the software will ask you to conn
181. filters behave this way The 8 Hz and 12 Hz here are points where the amplitude is already attenuated by 3dB You can choose whether you want to display the amplitude in magnitude between 0 and 1 or decibels The red line can show phase or delay Phase is expressed in degrees between 180 and 180 Delay is expressed in milliseconds MS and defines the inherent latency introduced by the digital IIR filter because of the phase shift BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 252 7 3 Coherence and Correlation Functions When you choose Coherence and Correlation you can choose from the following functions Category of data processing Coherence amp Correlation vw Type of computations EEG Coherence Cross Spectrum Subtype or Parameter EEG Coherence Cross Spectrum Correlation Linear Relationshic EEG Coherence Coherence is a measure of cross correlation between two signals in the frequency domain For EEG signals a high coherence suggests that signals are either driving each other do mutual driving or are driven by a common input There are several ways to compute coherence This software computes the coherence of two EEG signal sources by computing the ratio of the auto spectra of the two channels and their cross spectra You can set the following parameters Type of computation EEG Coherence Cross Spectrum Subtype or Parameter e 1200 He Key 1 The signal sources 2 The
182. fined by start end of Y scale range This will set the minimum volume at the bottom of the Y Scale of your signal So this is where the signal will be completely faded out At the top of the bargraph Y scale the volume will reach its maximum So effectively the signal displayed in the bargraph will equal a volume fader slider There is one catch though The sound will only play above threshold so make sure the threshold is towards or below the beginning of the Y scale at the bottom of the bargraph You may set it at 0 2 Volume Fading in out defined by level above below threshold This will set the mmimum volume at the threshold and the maximum volume at a certain level as a percentage of the total range above threshold or below You enter this range as a percentage of the total range If you set 100 you will get the same range as in the first option but now starting from the threshold rather than from the bottom of the bargraph Both options are shown graphically below Option 1 Option 2 Respiration Respiration 1660 0 1660 0 Maximum signal maximum volume Level above threshold maximum volume 1640 0 1540 0 1600 0 Threshold a B minimum volume Minimum signal minimum volume 1560 0 IF 1560 0 M7 Please note that this example is for a case of feedback above threshold In case of feedback below threshold the maximum volume of option 2 would be reached at a given level
183. g Disabling it on an Instrument The last option in the Feedback Options amp Thresholds dialog box is the following check mark button Enable Biofeedback You use this button to enable or disable the feedback for the entire instrument You could alternatively also set all biofeedback conditions above in between below to No Feedback but that has the disadvantage you loose those settings Un checking this Enable Biofeedback field will keep all your biofeedback settings but simply does not use them So effectively the feedback on that instrument will be switched OFF if the check mark is not set This will disable the biofeedback on this instrument Note if the biofeedback has been disabled the threshold will be shown as a dotted line A solid threshold indicates the Biofeedback is active Enabled Shortcuts You can use the key to toggle the enable state The key will show hide the threshold line Just point the mouse over the instrument and press the key EMG Level Dotted Threshold line Indicates Feedback is not enabled BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 154 Biofeedback Midi Tone feedback Midi Tone feedback When you choose the Midi Tone feedback option in the dialog box and click in the Edit button you will see a new dialog box presenting you with all the tone options MIDI tone feedback settings Tone V
184. ge of this channel to 100 500Hz or 100 200Hz BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 94 The next example of a channel is the heart rate HR computed from the BVP signal on input G Editing channel 33 in set lt Default channels gt Channel name Sample rate for this channet 3z Samples per Sec Signal source 1 Censor G BYP Signal source 2 Category of data processing General Signal Processing v Type of computations Pulse rate BYP 32 SPS ke Type of UNIT to display Default COLOR for this data channel This channel 33 uses the general signal processing category and the function Pulse Rate BVP to compute the HR The result of this channel 1s computed and stored 32 times per second See the sample rate at the top The unit in this case is beats per minute abbreviated as B Min and the default color is red In the advanced reference manual all the different categories of data processing will be explained so we will not elaborate on the more complex data processing features here However we will go into the use of data channel sets and how to create load and save them BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 95 Creating and Saving Channel Sets Most of the screens supplied with BioTrace for NeXus use the default channel set If no channel set can be found the software always loads this channel set by default So therefore you do not specifically need to loa
185. gher samplerates have been included V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 87 On inputs C and D you can connect 2 peripheral sensors in any combination Options are Type Recommended Sample rate 6 Skin conductance 32 7 Skin Temperature a2 8 Blood Volume Pulse 128 9 Respiration 32 Please note that the number of combinations are more limited on the NeXus 4 as it only has two auxiliary inputs The NeXus 10 has 4 aux inputs Selecting the sample rate of a sensor The first 4 inputs of NeXus A B C and D can acquire a signal at a rate of 256 512 1024 or 2048 samples per second Each sample has 24 bit resolution The way you label the input EEG ECG EMG EOG and SCP is only for your reference and does not impact the signal On the former page you can see the sample rates that we advise for each type of sensor There is a reason we have chosen these sample rates One of the main reasons is the so called Nyquist frequency We advise to use a sample rate that is at least times higher than the highest frequency you want to acquire So in case of EEG we measure signals in a range from DC 64 HZ Hence a sample rate of 256 samples sec fulfills this criterion In some cases a sample rate of 512 samples sec SPS is used but for neurofeedback purposes this is not really required For raw EMG we want to measure signal between 10 500Hz so a sample rate of 2048 SPS will be enough In some ca
186. graph and select Color Settings Primary drawing color Secondary drawing color Sa Gradient Fill Pattern _ lt none gt _ Threshold 1 color Cid A Color change Threshold color change lE nabled BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 230 Choose a primary color for instance Orange Then click the Threshold color change button and select the color red for the color change option This will now mean that when the theta beta level is higher than the threshold the color of the bargraph will change to red Next right click the bargraph and select Feedback Options amp Thresholds Now select an Inhibit state above threshold ABOVE Threshold Inhibit all feedback Edit Required TIME above milliseconds Set a required time of 250 milliseconds As a next step we will make a copy of the bargraph instrument and connect it to the EMG artifact channel Right click the bar graph and choose Copy Ctrl C Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Textis Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close Delete Copy Ctl c Paste Ctrl V Then right click and choose paste or simply use your keyboard and press Ctrl and the V key This will paste a copy of the bargraph to your screen Move the second bargraph to the right side of the first and
187. ground amp Borders Enter Text Enter HELP text Font Settings Button Image Button Action Back to Main Menu Close BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 204 This will bring up the Windows File selector dialog box where you can choose the directory screen category and name of the screen you want to jump to Basic Screens Stress Protocol Long EEG Client Screens 3 Stress Protocol Short EEG Master Screens EEG Screens EMG screens Favorite Screens Migraine and Headache O MultiModality Screens 3 MyScreens Respiration and HRY scp Skin Conductance GSR 3 Skin Temperature PE Stens Labs Biofeedback l 3 Stens Labs Neurofeedback My Documents My Computer a File name al Programming Button Actions Apart from the basic Hyperlink action you choose many other Button Actions Right click the button and choose Button Action from the property menu This will show the Button Action Settings dialog box BUTTON ACTION settings Select up to 4 button actions RECORD new Session ALWAYS perform this action when user dicks this button 7 ecole inna Perform action when user dicked AND conditions below are met PAUSE Session AUTO dick button ONLY when conditions are met button invisible a lt lt BACK Screen in script NEXT gt gt screen in script Time Counters yperlink to Screen This screen has bi Exit the Application Show Session Overvie
188. hat case you are using only one threshold namely threshold 1 Above threshold Theta Amplitude Th1 Below Threshold In the example above the level of threshold 1 Th1 has been set to 10 microvolt pk pk The first part of the Theta activity 1s taking place above threshold 1 then after a few seconds a part of the activity occurs below threshold 1 We could for instance decide that if the Theta amplitude is getting too high meaning it is above the threshold for too long for instance 1 4 second we will inhibit the feedback of the entire screen all instruments Biofeedback and Threshold Settings ABOVE Threshold Inhibit all feedback Required TIME above milliseconds An example of this Inhibit setting is shown above Enabling Threshold 2 When you enable the second threshold as well you will have 3 states to choose from Above threshold 1 In Between thresholds and Below threshold 2 An example of this situation is shown in the picture below In between thresholds Above threshold1 Beta Amplitude Th1 Th2 01 06 01 08 0110 01 12 01 14 01 16 01 18 01 20 01 22 01 24 01 26 01 28 Below Threshold2 Please note that the 1 threshold th1 is always the top threshold and the a threshold th2 is always the lower threshold BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 149 Biofeedback Overview of all the options In each of the three fields of Abo
189. hat you can observe trends in the signal better but the response of the FFT will slow down and you will not see the current activity You can solve that problem by placing two identical FFT instruments below each other One with no smoothing and one with high smoothing Instrument Style you can choose from 6 different instrument styles PolwGon gradient Ww Polyline rio fill FolvGon filled PolwGon gradient Histogram normal Histogram banded Histogram gradient Options 1 The 2D style is at present the only option you can set here Options 2 here you can choose whether to look at the magnitude or at the power spectrum The magnitude spectrum contains the square root values of the power spectrum BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 176 Instruments the Dual FFT Spectrum The 6th object on the toolbar is the Dual FFT Spectrum o This instrument is very similar to the former instrument Single FFT Spectrum except that this instrument displays the spectrum of two channels of data The display of the spectrum is shown in a horizontal fashion where the first channel is shown to the left and the second channel is shown to the right EEG2 The Display Options for this instrument are similar to the Single FFT Spectrum Please refer to the description of the display options for that instrument 1 page back Note you can turn the Refresh OFF under the Display Options 1
190. he DVD begins to play you have to select the title chapter you want to play form the main menu appearing in the DVD screen When the DVD 1s playing you can also use the MultiMedia DVD Control option from the main menu bar to navigate the DVD This will option a dialog box where you can select chapters and titles Biolrace Software for NeXus 10 Scere File Screen Beene Help Sensor Input configuration T Channel Set definition C MultiMedia DVD Control M MultiMedia DVD Navigation In this dialogbox you can navigate the DVD while itis playing during a session Please select a CHAPTER and a TITLE to play then choose PLAY to navigate to that part of the DVD No DVD playing PLAY Selected Chapter Tite BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 212 Objects the Game Object The 23rd object on the toolbar is the Biofeedback driven GAME Object The game object shows and plays a game within a window which will be part of the screen The game parameters can be controlled driven by biofeedback of physiological signals In some cases the user can also control the game with the keyboard like shooting by pressing the space bar An example of a Space Invader game is shown below Score Ships left i 4 4 aM RESTART STI E oos RT gt Note in case you use keyboard controls in the game before you use the keyboard click inside the game window so it has the f
191. his will have a built in microphone Then you will choose that same device for Audio In other cases you could use an external microphone or select another audio source Video Quality You can choose 100 low 384 medium and 768 high quality compressed video stored in WMV files WMV 384 is default If you need higher quality you could choose the AVI option This will however generate very big files on your hard disk and is only recommended for short sessions of less than 2 minutes After the session has been stored the AVI will be compressed BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 210 Objects the Audio Capture Object The 21st object on the toolbar is the Audio Capture Object This object only captures audio Typically it will use a microphone to store the sounds or voice during a live session When you right click the audio object you set the properties Background amp Borders Capture Settings Close This will open the Audio Capture Settings Dialog box Video and Audio Capture Settings Select VIDEO device Select Quality Audio Medium FM stereo qualit Select AUDIO device L Realtek AC97 Audio Please select the Capture device s you want to use for recording synchronized audio and or video The quality is defined by the level of compression Higher bitrates provide higher quality but also take up more space on your hard disk Cancel In this dialog box you select the audio
192. hould be displayed If you right click it you can choose the data channel it should display BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 136 The channel list box When you connect an instrument to a channel the channel list box will be shown Select channels lt Default channels gt 11 AEEG rayy 12 B EEG2 aw 13 A Theta Wave 714 AAlpha wave 15 ASMA Wave TE A Beta Waves 17 Gamma Wave 18 B Theta Wave 19 B Alpha Wave 21 B Beta Wave 22 B Gamma wave 23 A Theta amplitude 24 A Alpha amplitude 25 ASMA amplitude 26 A Beta amplitude 2 A Gamma amplitude 28 B Theta amplitude 29 B Alpha amplitude 30 B SMA amplitude 31 B Beta amplitude 32 B Gamma amplitude 33 HA BYP 34 EMG a 35 EMG2 rav EMG1 armp l Cha i eml Select 1 data channel OK Edt Cancel Most instruments only support data channel Make sure the instrument you connect to a data channel is able to display that channel correctly For instance it makes little sense to connect a raw EMG signal to a bargraph In that case you would choose a line graph instrument Connecting to multiple data channels Some instruments can connect to multiple channels The Line graph instrument is able to do this 0010 0012 0014 006 ooa Ua Oo 22 oo 24 00 26 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 137 If you select the Connect Data Channel option on the line graph shown above the channel
193. ia is limited in its entirety to the sum of the price that was paid for this product and the fee for the product support granted by Mind media under a possible separate support contract with the exception of death or personal injury arising from negligence by Mind media insofar as the applicable prescriptive law forbids limitation of damages in such cases Mind media cannot be held liable for the consequences of any incorrect information furnished by its staff or for any errors in this user guide and or other accompanying documentation including trade documentation The other party the user of the product of his or her representative must hold Mind media harmless and indemnify it against any third party damages irrespective of their nature and irrespective of the relationship with the other party V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 22 2 2 The Main Menu Let s get started when you launch the software it will always show the main menu a sample of this is shown below actual screen display may vary The main menu is an easy way to use the BioTrace software and a good way to start familiarizing yourself with the overall structure of the system and its simplicity of use Let s take a look at the demo protocols that come supplied with the software to get there click on the START button at the top of the main menu Note you can always get to the main menu by pressing the ESCAPE
194. ient Delete Session Import FLASH Session Import PC Session The client information is stored in the integrated database that you can access through the dialog box shown above The Session data is stored in separate subfolders contained in the main BioTrace Data directory When you record a new session you are always required to select a client for whom this session will be stored In case you add a new client to the database the minimum information that you should supply is the first and last name of the client V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 51 In the picture below you see and example of the dialog box that is shown when you click the Edit Client Information button or Add Client button Client Properties Client Information Use the fields below to enter biographical information Last Name Sample First Name John City ga ao i Birth Date Zip Postal Code Grade Oo Sex Country me ore nots O O Referred By Primary Therapist MTAdmin ka First Visit The two required fields that must be filled out are the first and last name The computer will assign a default Client ID but you may change that ID V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 52 3 5 Biofeedback options amp Inhibit functions Most of the built in Windows multi media features for audio and visual feedback are available in the instruments and
195. ile formats are supported Generally we advise to use JPG because these files are compressed and much smaller than the BMP format BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 203 Objects the Button Control Object The 19th object on the toolbar is the Button Control Object This object does not display any data but is a versatile and powerful control object that you can use to make your screen do things When the user clicks a button you define what Button Action the button will execute A simple example is for instance the use of a button for navigation by turning the button into a hyperlink to another screen To measure the BVP the sensor is placed on the middle Below you will now observe a blood volume pulse signal finger of your left or non dominant hand Connect the plug obtained from the middle finger Press NEXT to view the next to the input G of the NeXus 10 screen Clicking THIS button will hyperlink to THIS screen A Hyperlink will load the screen that has been programmed under the button and replace the current screen This way you can navigate between screens by clicking buttons When you build your own protocols and screens you will probably find this to be an easy and simple way for users to use your protocols The action that a button performs when clicked 1s called the Button Action You can directly choose Hyperlink to screen with a right click START NEW Session Back
196. ilities and storage capabilities or your computer need to match certain minimal requirements Recommendations for Sound Virtually all computers support 16 bit stereo sound and such a soundcard is not really required 24 bit sound is not required either For optimal sound playback however we can suggest the following 1 If you get a new sound card get a Creative Labs card 2 Get good speakers or a good headphone 3 5 1 Audio output is not required but nice to have 4 Get a drive that can play DVD and CD Both are supported in BioTrace 5 Install the most recent drivers for your sound card from the internet 6 For recording sound or voice input get an external microphone BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 270 8 3 Configuring your computer for Video Capture BioTrace supports real time video capture while recording physiological signals The captured video can be played back synchronized with the physiological signals and offers a precision of up to a single frame about 50 milliseconds When you have recorded a video capture you can replay the session or step through it with the cursor keys You can set markers offline based on the video image currently displayed while stepping through the data using the cursor keys When you hold the Ctrl key the cursor keys will advance 50 ms for each step You will need the following minimal requirements to capture video 1 A Webcam connected a free USB po
197. inly has a few more advanced analysis functions This second chapter provides you with a quick overview of the software while presenting the basic functions In this chapter we will take the first steps to review sessions start new sessions load screens look at session data and compute statistical results Chapter 3 deals with the key concepts of the BioTrace software architecture and explains what screens data channels and sessions are You need to understand these concepts if you want to use the more advanced functions of the software Chapter 4 covers the user interface and how to operate BioTrace with the mouse and keyboard Chapters 5 and beyond deal with the more advanced technical details and guide you in creating your own screens and protocols Intended use of this manual Please note that this user manual only covers the use and handling of the technical functions of the BioTrace software It does not deal with physiological or clinical applications Nor is this user manual or the software intended to be a guide of how to use or interpret the physiological signals data or session results For that kind of information please refer to the relevant professional literature and publications This manual assumes that you are familiar with all the basics of the Microsoft Windows operating system and using the mouse and keyboard functions This manual does not explain to you how to operate your computer or how to use the Windo
198. ion Help A Theta amplitude Focus your attention keep the Mandala in motion The Mandala Plug In expands BioTrace with an instrument that rotates colored Mandalas in a 3D space The Mandalas are layered on top of each other and their Size Brightness and Rotation can be driven by Biofeedback and Physiological signals The Mandala Plug In Settings In order to open the Plug in Settings you need to right click just outside the border of the Instrument As indicated by the arrow in the picture below This is different from the other Instrument that accepts right clicking everywhere inside the Instrument Example right click just outside the border to open the drop down menu BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 189 Select PLUGIN type PLUGIN settings Connect to data channe Edit data channel Link to Instrument Background amp Borders Close After you have selected the PLUGIN settings the following dialog box will appear Mandala Layer Properties Select up to 3 SETS of mandala IMAGES in the listbox on the right If you select more Mandala Images 1 than 1 SET the sets will switch depending on Mandala Images 2 the time or criteria you define below Mandala Images 3 arr ane F Sadh every N k Mandala Images 4 Mandala Images 5 Switch after N feedback frames 1000 lt enter N here 1 1000 Layer 1 dynamic layer Instruments controlling layer 1 TYPE of contro
199. ions cccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeaaas 89 4 7 Channel Sets and Editing Channels cccccccssssssssssssccccssssssssssssccccsscsesees 91 Sensors and virtual data channe sorene a a a 92 Editing amp defining a data channel nnenenseessseoenesssssssseerrsssssssssererssssssseeeressssss 92 Creatine and Saving Channel Sets censeri ea a 96 Loading Channel Sets amp Attaching them to a new Screen seeessssssssseersssss 96 Changing channel sets during recording ssseeeeeesssssssseeeresssssseseerrssssssseeerees 97 4 8 Screen modes Real Time amp Overview mode eessseossseosseoossecsoseossseosseooso 98 DS WIECOING DCLW CCN INOUE Si cia cic a a tedendtcele vices eleetuasnn 98 Realtime mode Tunc ONS lt 5 ctor lahintsasetedgncaictine caceiabieun EE 99 Session oyvyeryview Mode functions siiicaesiensardeeadwiasononsan dedi weamewontandaachcasaowennaedeatue ses 99 4 9 Real Time Screen Mode cccccscoccssscsesescccscssccesescccsesccccccsccesesccecesccccsesosese 100 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 3 The screen Caption and Menu Dafen a EA tate ectaneets 100 PUMPS Cre SU Modessa T buena eee T 101 THe SeSSiOm COMMON DUTlONS easicterecetiesutestaaeieesiet a desieteecen 101 The time display amp indication of the inhibit state eecccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 The time slider and time key controls ccccccssesseecccecccceeeee
200. ires it to be so that it is visible Line graph Refresh each sweep This option not displayed in the example will refresh the range every time a line graph instrument is starting to redraw from the beginning Refreshing in this case means that the range will be readjusted even if the signal is not below the MIN or above the MAX FFT Frequency Range FFT Frequency range this is the place where you enter the start and end of the frequency range of an instruments that display a power or magnitude spectrum Examples are Single FFT Spectrum the Dual FFT Spectrum and the 3D FFT Spectrum The picture below shows a single FFT Spectrum with a horizontal frequency range setting from 0 to 40 Hz The vertical Y Scale range is 0 50 uV EEG Power Spectrum BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 142 FFT Epoch Size A fast Fourier based instrument needs to know how many seconds of data have to be analyzed Default is an epoch size of 1 or 2 seconds Setting a 1 second size will results in each resulting frequency value called a bin to cover Hz Setting an epoch size of 2 seconds will result in a bin size of half a Herz 0 5 Hz You can choose epoch sizes between and 64 seconds depending on the sample rate of the source channel In the example on the former page the epoch size of the spectrum is 1 Hz Show FFT Statistics Some of the FFT based instruments like the Single FFT Spectrum can
201. irst column labeled date of a session in the list of sessions An example is shown below Notice that the mouse pointer changes into a pointing hand when you are over the first column Date Description Time Duration Sensors Screen used 15 6 2004 Sample session with bv 12 48 20 00 05 21 EEG EMG EDR Screen 15 6 2004 2xEMG session 14 40 54 00 02 24 EEG EMG EDR Screen EEG 1 Channel 0 57 55 00 03 14 EEG EMG EDR Screen 26 10 2004 Video Capture Test BVP 1 48 48 00 01 00 EEG EMG EDR Screen 8 3 2005 EKG HR Session 18 12 59 00 05 08 EEG RSF Resoiration anc V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 74 Importing a Flash Session Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report Clinical Management LOAD session Delete Session Import PC Session The NeXus is capable of storing 1 to 10 channels of physiological data on an internal flash memory card SD or MMC type The SD card supports up to 1 gigabyte of memory space The length of the session is only limited by the space available on the flash card and the lifetime of your batteries This again depends on the capacity of the batteries and the amount of sensors you use Depending on these circumstances you can store 2 20 hours of data per session Before you start a flash session you need to initialize and configure the flash card so the NeXus knows which sensors should be stored See the Sensor Input Configuration box open this by pressing
202. irst marker Co cance Lh 05 16 0518 05 20 o5 22 O24 05 26 05 28 When you want to see the marker you simply press the TAB key to switch to the session Overview An example is shown below Tr Udo lrace screens Favorite screensiGok screen screen File Screen Configuration Help Ty first marker V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 36 6 00 5 00 So here you see it is very easy to place markers in real time during a session and view them in the session overview Next we will STOP and SAVE the session 2 8 Saving a Session Press the STOP button on the session control bar Now an alert box will appear that asks you if you want to SAVE the session that you have just recorded Stop and SAVE this Session YES or NO Choose CONTINUE to continue recording EEC EO E Click in the OK button and then enter a description of your session The Continue button will continue the session Choosing NO will end the session without saving it Enter your description line For this session My First Session Then confirm with the OK button the session is now saved You will need this session description later on to identify the session V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 37 2 9 Loading a Session When you want to retrieve a session for review you can load the session via the main menu Press the ESCAPE butto
203. ise you to restart the computer so that all settings are stored and you do not need to re enter them After you have restarted the computer the next step you will take is to launch the BioTrace Software through the Windows Start button 0 BioTrace Software E BioFeedback Literature TA Quick Start Manual Software settings d TO Manual Hardware E NeuroFeedback Literature rr BioTrace Document Search amp Help and Support f Run Log Off Mind Media Turn Off Computer Windows XP Home Edition actual screen display may vary You will then be presented with the MAIN MENU of the software This is the place where you can start to use the NeXus and run your first session In the next chapter we will explain this main menu and the main BioTrace functions to you in a quick introduction In chapter 3 and beyond you will find a lot more detail on the advanced functions and features of BioTrace V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 20 2 0 Getting Started a Quick Introduction 2 1 About this manual Welcome to the BioTrace Software Now that you have installed the software it is time to get to know and use it This manual is divided up in several chapters As you have seen the first part only deals with the software installation The BioTrace Software version for the NeXus 4 and NeXus 10 are very similar the 10 ma
204. it as a pre programmed slide show where the BioTrace screens are the slides The trick is in the way that the screens are connected and how and when the next screen is displayed Often you will use a combination of hyperlinked screens and a scripted sequence Take a look at the example below E back to start A Protocol starts with hyperlinked screens 1 2 and 3 Migraine 11 Finished T EA S D at end of seq Migraines Pause the session stops C Sequence is repeated N times To create something like this may look like a daunting task at first but in fact it is not so complicated as it seems There are two steps to build a protocol 1 You begin by creating ALL the screens slides that you will use in your protocol slide show This may include creating some images videos and sounds you will use in your protocol 2 Then you set up the links between the screen and save the screens and the scripts if you created any BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 235 In the protocol example on the former page the first 3 screens 1 2 and 3 contains buttons that are labeled lt lt back and next gt gt For instance the back in screen 2 will jump hyperlink back to screen 1 if the user clicks in it The next button will jump to screen 3 if the user clicks in it Note that you have to label the buttons this way yourself and you also have to define the Button ac
205. it does provide an insight into the total signal BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 249 The result of IIR and FIR digital is always another signal or waveform See the example below A EEG1 raw FIR filtered ALPHA wave IIR filtered ALPHA wave In this example the result of filtering the raw EEG with an FIR based Alpha band pass filter middle and an HR based Alpha filter bottom is shown This example was computed in review mode The experts will note here that the phase of the FIR based Alpha wave is the same as that of the original raw signal at the top The IIR filter based Alpha shows a delay and some phase distortion What does Alpha Beta etc Amplitude mean The amplitude of a wave can be used for biofeedback Usually an RMS amplitude of a waveform like the Alpha wave shown above is computed on small portions of the wave When for instance 1 8 of a second of the Alpha wave is used to compute the amplitude it will update fast enough and display all activity above 8Hz correctly Alpha Amplitude lyi tt Ply pis Niel ci wth NAL haat AY 01 40 01 42 44 01 46 01 48 01 50 The Alpha amplitude could also be derived from the FFT through an FFT band pass amplitude but it would be much slower causing larger delays and when it would be based on a 1 second FFT it would also not be as precise Spectral leaking BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 20
206. ize of the time axis from a drop down menu Time axis lt Fit Session gt Time axis 10 seconds Time axis 30 seconds Time axis 60 seconds Time axis 2 minutes Time axis 5 minutes g Time axis 10 minutes Select Channels for Overview i Time axis 15 minutes Event markers Time axis 30 minutes Segment options Time axis 45 minutes TR Time axis 1 hour Analysis Functions d aah Time axis 2 hours Recompute Session Overview Time axis 3 hours 4 Compute statistics t Time axis 6 hours a Artifact Rejection Time axis 1 hours Size of TIME axis d Time axis 24 hours Close e SSS a S ar 03 D3 4 afao 05 Here you can set the exact size in time of the overview screen or choose the option lt Fit Session gt to fit the entire session data into the screen Note pressing the Backspace key on your keyboard will set the size of the overview time scale back to fit the entire session When you only want to view a small part you can select a segment part of the session and select the Zoom Selected Data BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 107 Overview channel display options By right clicking on the scale of a channel that is shown on the overview screen we can select from the following options 1 Select more channels that are to be display on the same scale 2 Select the display type line graph bargraph 3 Select the da
207. ker Session overview omeoothing Smoothing Save current Screen Ctr P Print Data Ctr C COPY an object edit Ctr PASTE an object edit Cirk UNDO changes edit double dick to activate Shift Ctrl for loading secondary screen Save these SCREEN shortcuts Load SCREEN shortcuts So the K key is the only short cut key that you really have to remember because through this key you can get to all other keys Now that you know these keys you can try them out Close this dialog box by pressing Exit or by hitting the Escape key and press the L key You will see that it will enable you to Load a screen Press O and you will see it will Open the client and session database V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 58 You can also activate these shortcuts by double clicking on the description line in the lists On the fly switching between screens A special case of the short cut keys are the function Keys These are labeled F1 F12 on your keyboard and can be used to instantly load a screen into the primary or secondary monitor hold the control key to display on the secondary monitor Function key shortcuts are a quick and easy way to load a screen Open the screen browser and click once on a screen preview in order to select it Then press a function key F1 F12 on your keyboard to assign that key to the screen you just selected That will create the link Screen bro
208. l The software will ask you to connect a data channel to the animation instrument Choose channel 36 Even though we will not use it at this point Size the animation to make it bigger Then right click it and choose Select Animation Select Animation Cnannerct m data channel BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 227 From the dialog box select the Water Lily by left clicking it in the list on the left Select an item from the list PREVIEW Ader ffe Balg Ball Blinc Flow Gauge Lift Rabbitt Rate Rating scpn scpp E Smil Description Stress Strp Image Alignment met Align FIT image to box v aso Inset all edges Then choose the OK button and wait for the animation to appear The next step is that we now must Link the animation to the bargraph instrument Right click the animation instrument and select Link to Instrument Select Animation Connect to data channel Edit data channe Link to Instrument S iar i Select the bargraph instrument in the list box and also make sure a check mark is set at the Link to Threshold state button at the left bottom of the dialog box Then choose OK Link to THRESHOLD state L_ Link to RANGE based state Now the animation is linked Our goal is to make the lily flower open when the EMG is below threshold Indicating a certain relaxation
209. l se any J tahoe no 3 Rotaton Speed ne Layer 2 dynamic layer Instruments controlling layer 2 TYPE of control _ _ Size max 2 Bargraph lt A Theta amplitude gt OEE eee 3 rotation Speed rex Layer 3 static layer F Size max Show as BACKGROUND layer j Brightness max In this dialog box you can edit and modify all the settings for this plug in Please note that the dialog box and settings for other plug ins will be and look very different The Mandala uses Sets of Images Each set consists of three images for each of the three layers These layers are projected into 3D space and made to respond to the physiological activity The Mandala plug in has three layers BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 190 1 Layer 1 which is a dynamic layer that can change its size brightness and rotation speed using input from another instrument 2 Layer 2 which is a another dynamic layer that can change its size brightness and rotation speed using input from another instrument 3 Layer 3 which is a static layer that functions as a background layer You can choose up to 8 sets of Mandala to appear in sequence in your DirectX Plug In instrument You do so by selecting a set and clicking the lt lt Add Set button The next step is that you should select one or more instruments that control the layers This means that the screen displaying the Mandala should contain one o
210. l V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 272 So if you save this DATA directory to a backup medium this means you will have made a backup of 2 All the stored physiological session data all the signals 3 The entire client database and all client data and report files 4 All the recorded captured video and audio files You make a backup of this directory by 1 Writing Burning this directory to a CD or better to a DVD 2 Writing it to an external hard disk a faster method 3 Writing it to an external server through a fast network An option that you have is to compress this data directory to a ZIP file before you back it up This can be a really time consuming process but does reduce the size of the backup The other advantage 1s that it keeps the state of all the files intact When you burn the data directory straight to a read only device such as a CDROM it will change the attributes of all the files to read only which may cause the software to be unable to change those files once they are restored from such a backup medium In that case you will have to clear the read only attributes manually Now an example is shown how you compress an entire directory to ZIP file r 5 m Open Export Explore Search Sharing and Security 1 Images Send To _ Mail Recipient cut LJ Compressed zipped Folder copy E Desktop create shortcut Paste My Documents Create Shortcut Bluetooth Delete 1 i Rename
211. l containing activity in the frequency range between O and 1000 Hz will contain an offset caused by the electrical noise in that frequency band This electrical noise is generated by a combination of the electrical properties of the amplifiers the impedance level of the electrodes and environmental influences A EEG1 raw A e n e0 A m n A Om r awr n A A A 4 Wa A Gamma amplitude In the picture above an example is shown of an EEG signal which shorted inputs in the frequency range from 2 45 Hertz In this case in the gamma amplitude band 35 45 Hertz an electrical noise of 0 28 microvolt pk pk is displayed We may now correct the RMS amplitude by pressing the following button Corect Noize AMS Zeroing The following dialog box will be shown RMS Offset amp Noise Level Correction zeroing When computing the RMS amplitude on a digitally filtered EEG or EMG signal you can correct this RMS amplitude for offset or system noise l Shorten the plus red and minus black of the corresponding input A B C or D and observe the RMS levels below Uncorrected actual RMS value RMS value after correction s Disable Zeroing and Noise Correction 5 zeroing enable and update Correction 0 100 Note the system noise of the NeXus 10 for a typical EEG band such as Theta Alpha or SMR is typically in the order of 0 1 to 0 2 pV RMS In this dialog box we can now set the amount of
212. ld change from the EMG channel set to the other one during a recording the meaning of your signals would suddenly change So in this example the EMG signal on input A would suddenly be interpreted as an EEG signal with a different sample rate etc BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 97 So therefore you can not change channel sets during a recording It would render your signals invalid because the software would not know how to interpret them 4 8 Screen modes Real Time amp Overview mode BioTrace screens run in two different modes The first and default mode is the real time mode the second is the session overview mode Think of them as two sides of the same coin the screen you are currently using Switching between modes The quickest way to switch between both screen modes is to use the Tab key on your keyboard On a QWERTY keyboard you find this just left from the Q Real time mode Session overview mode Fie Soe Corfgveten Hep Fle Sree Configveten Hep sra n s ae 100 8 sas Mone roos 150 100 8 Edit Screen CE Edit Sequence Script Q Grid Show full screen F Show Hide Control Buttons Close Secondary Screen Note when you create a new screen remember that you have to create both the real time part of the screen and the session overview part of the screen Both are saved into the same file A single screen contains both modes
213. le for HRV analysis is shown below Display Options and Range Settings Y scale RANGE o oo Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment Auto FIT to O MA FFT Frequency range Hz FFT Epoch size 2 Sec 0 037 hz bin Show FFT statistics Smoothing Data TypeStats Instrument Style PolwGon gradient Display options 1 3D Style 1 Sec Refresh Display options 2 Show HAY Spectrum Note that for slow signals such as heart rate respiration and skin conductance you can set much greater FFT Epoch sizes The reason is that the sample rates of those signals are lower Choose Show HRV Spectrum for a 0 0 4 Hz range setting No smoothing is supported on this instrument The Display Options 1 set the refresh rate of the instrument The type of gradient can be selected from the Color properties Connect to data channel Edit data channel Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings Close In the Color Dialog Box that will open you click on the Gradient Fill Pattern button Then you can pick a gradient from a list of gradients Gradient Fill Pattern e BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 179 Instruments the Polygraph Instrument The 8th object on the toolbar is the Polygraph Instrument This instrument does not unlike the other line graph instruments support feedback options but does allow combining up to 32 channels of li
214. lete Session Import FLASH Session Import PC Session ee This option opens up the dialog box where you manage the basic information about the therapists and the clinic You can enter the address and name of your clinic in here as well as add new therapists This information can later be used for printing out reports V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 73 Clinical Management Therapist Information Clinic Information Therapist Information Name Clinic My Clinic Short Name NewTherapist Address Clinic 1234 Main Street First Name Bigtown ABC 54321 Middle Name Last Name Admin Select the Primary Therapist of the Clinic NewTherapist Delete Therapist New Therapist Adding a Therapist In case you want to Add a new therapist you use the clinical management function shown above and click the new therapist User button Delete Session Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report Clinical Management Import FLASH Session Import PC Session This option will delete a single session from the selected client It will delete ALL the session files including capture video or audio files session notes etc Load Session Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report Clinical Management Delete Session Import FLASH Session Import PC Session This option will load all the files belonging to the selected session You may also load a session by double clicking on the f
215. lick the instrument Instrument Style Width 3 thick Display options 1 Polarity Norrnal v Display options 2 Show Grid Medium The Polarity setting defines whether a positive value is plotted as going Up or Down on the Y scale of the line graph For SCP signals the polarity is sometimes inversed BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 172 Instruments the Dual Y Scale Line graph The 3rd object on the toolbar is the Dual Y Scale Line graph This instrument is quite similar to the other Line graph instrument except that it has two Y Scales rather than one Y Scale This means that you can now combine two different modalities in the same instrument An example of a combined display of respiration blue and heart rate red is shown below RISE 1680 0 1640 0 1560 0 00 44 00 46 00 48 00 50 00 52 00 54 00 56 00 53 01 01 02 01 04 01 06 The ranges of HR 70 to 95 and respiration 1560 to 1650 are very different but by using the dual Y scale Line graph you can combine then in a single graph and overlap the graphs We advise you go to the Display Options amp Ranges setting for this instrument Connect to data channel Edit data channel Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Text s Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close Then set the Auto FIT to MIN MAX and Line graph Refresh each sweep
216. list box will allow you to choose up to 4 channels Select channels lt Default channels gt 1 Sensor A EEG 2 Sensor B EEG SensorlEMG raw 4 SensorDO EMG raw p Sengor E SC G5A 6 Sensor F Temp T Sengor G ByP a Sensor H ASP 9 Sensorl Osimetn 25 p02 10 Sensor Osimetry pulse 11 4 EEG1 rayy Ti B EEG raw 13 A Theta Wave 14 A Alpha wave 15 ASMA Wave TE A Beta Wayes Tf A Gamma Wave 18 B Theta Wave 19 B Alpha Wave 20 B SMA Wave B Beta wave E Gamma wave 23 A Theta amplitude 24 AAlpha amplitude 25 ASMA amplitude A Beta amplitude Humber of channels selected 3 Note that the channel list box will indicate the number of channel that you selected at the bottom If you press the OK button it will use your selection If you choose Cancel it will use the last used channel selection Properties Edit a data channel If you choose the Edit button in the channel list box shown above you can edit the data channel definition You can also right click the instrument and choose the Edit Data Channel option directly as follows Connect to data channel Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Texts Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close In one of the next chapters we will discuss the editing of data channels in detail so we will not elaborate on this in here BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V
217. ll through the session Click inside the scrollbar and move the scrollbar while holding dragging the scrollbar This function only works 1f a session has been loaded Another way to step through the session is the session control keys 1 Left cursor arrow key steps back 1 second 2 Right cursor arrow key steps forward 1 second 3 Page Down key steps forward 5 seconds 4 Page Up key steps back 5 seconds Note if you hold the Ctrl key down while using the cursor keys you will step through the session in steps of 50 milliseconds This function can be useful when reviewing physiological data with synchronized video You can step through the data one video frame at a time The Real Time screen mode is also the mode that you will use to Edit screens in the screen editor BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 102 4 10 Session Overview Screen Mode Let s now look deeper into the Session Overview Mode In the former chapters we have discussed most of the real time mode functions For this example we first need to load the John Sample sample session Press O on your keyboard Date Description Time Duration ieee Sample session with byp tmp sc rsp temp 12 48 20 00 05 21 Then load the following screen HR Respiration from the category Basic Screens in the screen browser press L on your keyboard Screen browser LOADING a new scre
218. lor properties dialog box Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Texts Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds Close BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 146 Properties Font Settings Most instruments have FONT settings The FONT setting applies to the numerical text used in numerical instruments or to the scale text Y scale and Time Scale fonts for other instruments Mean EMG Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Text s Font Settings Close If you right click an object and choose Font Settings Microsoft Windows will open a standard FONT selector box actual screen display may vary X Font style LI Anal Black O Adal Namow F BATAVIA Bold Italic Book Antiqua Bookman Old Style F Browallia New talic Bold Effects _ Strikeout L Underline Color B Black w In this box you can select the Font itself the Style and Size of the Font Note that the Color that you select here will impact the colors of the scales of the instrument EEG Power Spectrum ENEE E ct to data channel 1 0 0 Edit data channel 7 5 Soper a oe 5 0 Display Options amp Ranges l Tite Texts ZEER i ul z Font Settings 0 0 P Se C a 0 0 30 40 The sample
219. ls you need for your protocol only then start creating the links and sequence script Tip 3 Start building your first protocol with just three hyperlinked screen The start screen the middle screen and the end screen Put a lt lt back and next gt gt button on each screen Tip 4 Create a screen template with the buttons and images in place if many of your screens are similar Then save that template screen under the name screen screen2 screen3 etc Then load each screen 1 2 3 etc and set the buttons action hyperlinks on the buttons This saves you time Tip 5 start simple then expand your protocol one step at a time Tip 6 for testing a protocol screen sequence you can place buttons in a screen for instance on your primary monitor which contain a button action that will step back or step forward 1 screen in the current sequence 06 NEXT gt gt screen in script Tip 7 for testing hyperlinked screens you can simply load an existing session and click in the buttons as if you were doing an actual recording You do not need to record a new session to test your protocols Tip 8 If you ask yourself where shall I place my protocols so that they are easily accessible from the start menu of BioTrace The answer is click the START button on the main menu Now the protocol screen will be shown At the left bottom of this screen you will see a button that says My Protocols My Protocols BioTrace
220. m and the graphics run slow on the secondary monitor it is possible to swap the use of the primary and secondary monitor You can drag your Windows Taskbar to the secondary screen and decide to use the primary monitor showing the primary screens as a client screen V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 44 3 2 Data Channels The physiological signals obtained from the sensors are stored in virtual data channels The simplest data channel is one where a data channel is simply represents a sensor In that case the data channel does not compute anything but only stores and displays the sensor data When you look at the data channel list you will see that the first 10 data channels for the NeXus are representing the sensors You can display the channel set by selecting the following option File Screen Sane Help Sensor Inputs Channel Set Or by pressing the C key on your keyboard The sample list of data channels below shows you the default channel set Select DATA channel s 1 Sensor EEG 2 Sensor B EEG 3 SensorliEMG raw 4 Sensor D EMG raw Rp Sensor E EDAR GSA b Sensor F Temp e Sensor G BWP a Sensor H ASP 9 Sensorl O simetre 25 p02 10 Sensonl Osimetry pulse 11 A EEGI raw 12 BEEEG raw Tt A Theta Wave 14 A Alpha wave 15A SMA Wave TE Beta Waves 1 A Gamma Wave 18 6 Theta Wave 19 B Alpha Wave 0 B SMA Wave 21 B B
221. mary monitor Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor Make sure you have plugged in a second monitor into the Video Graphics Card and switch it on Now click on the secondary monitor in the dialog box shown above and enable it by clicking on the option Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor That is all On the primary monitor that is the monitor that you use when you have only 1 monitor you will see the usual desktop and all the windows controls On the secondary monitor you will see only the desktop image and no controls or icons BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 267 Please note the primary and secondary monitor are allowed to have different resolutions So you could for instance set up the primary monitor to 1280x1024 pixels and the secondary monitor to 1024x768 pixels The idea is that the primary monitor will show your clinician screen whereas the secondary screen will show the client screen This client screen may for instance only show a single instrument or a single animation or biofeedback driven computer game Most often the secondary screen is used for training only Sometimes it is displayed on a beamer or LCD projector instead of a monitor When the secondary screen is mainly used to display animations video or games using a lower resolution on the secondary monitor is even recommended because it will run faster Recommendations for graphics cards and monitors 1 W
222. me the Favorite Screens category The button Add Category will create a new empty category Screen Thumbnail Previews After you select a screen category all the screens present will be shown in a list on the right as thumbnail images You can select them by left clicking on them with the mouse V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 68 Loading Screens in the screen browser You can load a screen by selecting it and clicking one of the Load as primary Screen or the Load as Secondary Screen buttons However a faster way to load a screen is by simply double clicking the selected screen Load a primary screen double click the selected screen Load a secondary screen double click while holding the Ctrl key down Screen Function keys quick load An alternative way of loading a screen is by selecting it left mouse button and pressing a function key This will assign this function key for instance F1 to the selected screen Next time you press the F1 key it will quick load the screen Holding the Ctrl key while pressing F1 will quick load the screen as the secondary screen Deleting Screens You can delete a screen in the screen browser by selecting it and clicking the Delete Screen button Copying or Emailing screens If you ever want to send a copy of a screen that you have created to another person you can simply open the category of the
223. ments support this features where you can define what type of data you want an instrument to display A good instrument to use this feature on is the numerical instrument Below an example is shown where the first numerical instrument displays the current actual EMG level the 2 shows the minimum EMG level of the last 15 seconds and the last and 3 instrument shows the mean EMG level of the last 15 seconds Actual EMG Min EMG Mean EMG The instruments that support this feature are 1 The numerical instrument 2 The bargraph 3 The Vernier ruler instrument 4 The zoomer instrument 5 The animation instrument The options that you can choose here are shown in the drop down list that appears when you click on the button Curent ACTUAL data value MIN statistic 16 Sec MAs statistic 15 5ec MEAN statistic 15 Sec STODEY statistic 16 Sec Coeff of Wanablity 15 Sec Amplitude AMS 2 82 Session MIN statistic Session MAS statistic Session MEAN statistic Session STODEY statistic Session Coeff of Wanablity Session Amplitude AMS 2 623 16 Sec Basic Statistics Session Basic Statistics Show the REWARD counter You can choose from 1 The actual current value default 2 The min max mean standard deviation Coefficient of variability and RMS amplitude of the last 15 seconds 3 The same values but now for the whole part of the session leading up to the current sample 4 A list of all basic
224. more demo protocol The BVP signal shows the relative amplitude of the blood volume which varies for each pulse When the BVP amplitude increases the blood flow increases vasodilation When the BVP amplitude decreases the blood flow decreases vasoconstriction The distance between the peaks indicates the heart rate or heart beat frequency The faster the heart rate the closer together the peaks will be In this picture you can see how the peaks of the blood volume pulse are higher in the middle then in the beginning This is an indication of vasodilation Keep pressing the NEXT gt gt button to see the next screens V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 26 In this screen you see a combination of the BVP signal and the derived heart rate The heart rate is computed on a peak to peak basis and updated every heart beat So therefore the HR signal looks a little blocky Notice that the time axis of the two line graphs is different In this screen the BYP pulse signal and the heartrate HR are both shown in linegraph instruments Observe how the pulse amplitude and interbeat intervals vary over time This is one way to observe the heart rate variability HRV However BioTrace has many ways to view and train HRV There are special screen sets designed for this Blood Volume Pulse Signal You can also observe in this signal that the HR values vary
225. mperature BVP amplitude vasoconstriction vasodilation Theta Alpha and SMR amplitude This correlation function will not work well when correlating fast signals such as raw EEG ECG or EMG This function always needs two source channels For example select a segment of session data and choose Analysis Functions gt Correlation Analysis 1700 0 m A Segment compute Statistics 1650 0 Segment add Segment Segment add Artifact area Segment TYPE definitions Analysis Functions HRV Analysis 1600 0 100 0 Correlation Analysis Zoom SELECTED data os Averaged Response Analysis 90 0 Export SELECTED data 7 7 V 30 0 Close VV P Vif Foi The following dialog box will be shown in this sample we use HR and Respiration Correlation Analysis This function will compute an estimation of the correlation between two data channels using a Pearson Product Moment The data is obtained from epochs of 250 millisecond Please select two data channels Correlate with BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 127 In this example we compute the correlation between the computed HR heart rate which was derived from the BVP sensor and the respiration activity The sample session we analyze contain HR and RSP data acquired during an abdominal breathing exercise Due to the RSA respiratory sinus arrhythmia effect which increases the HR during inhalation and decreases it during exhalation
226. n labeled OK And the software will need some time to compute the results When it is ready a print preview will appear showing the averaged data You can print out this page on your printer BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 130 BioTrace Physiological Report Version 0 99 C Mind Media Netherlands 2004 2005 Concise Client and Session information Client test test ID 000037 Session SCP session with protocol Date Time 11 08 44 PM 9 28 2005 Duration 11min2sec Averaged Response of channel 41 Av DC EEG over 8 Second Epochs Ah an 2 8 Oy 88 Rist a uaa Bor Ika a trie Bic M m fir By Aten ithe E eft is rie tof Sect ht tat tt Baa titi Co art Rr tirri aah t E EOE E S T E oe ooz coos ow acs ooce cour oroa 2 types of EPOCHS have been found EPOCH type 1 Positive feedback Total number of Responses 29 EPOCH type 2 Negative feedback Total number of Responses 35 Samplerate of channel 41 256 samples sec Page 1 of 1 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 131 5 0 The Screen Editor BioTrace features a WYSIWYG screen editor that is fully integrated into the software It is not necessary to pause or stop sessions while using the screen editor You enter the screen editor mode through main menu bar Under the Screen item choose Edit Screen Biolrace Software for Nex zac Configuration Help Etsem Edit Seque
227. n will start You can also think of it as a feedback delay The default value here is 0 milliseconds In some cases you will use a required TIME setting Example 1 when during neuromuscular training a certain EMG level has been reached you want this level to last at least 1 second before the reward tone or music is played In that case you set a required time of 1000 milliseconds Example 2 when doing EEG feedback you have set an Inhibit condition on Theta At the same time you are using a DVD video on the secondary screen for positive feedback You set a required time of 250 milliseconds so that the DVD will only pause when Theta is too high for this period Setting a required time of 0 ms may in some cases start and stop the DVD too frequently BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 150 Biofeedback Inhibit All feedback This is the only biofeedback condition that will turn other instrument s biofeedback temporarily off Note that you can have multiple instruments applying an Inhibit All In the example below you see two instruments that have set an inhibit for levels above threshold The 3 instrument is producing midi tone sequence feedback based on the SMR activity Settings not shown here Inhibit above threshold pauses the SMR feedback a eer Theta Inhibit Beta Inhibit SMR Feedback From the picture above you can now see that each of the inhibit instruments
228. n Configuration Help __Sensor F Temp _ E Warm your hands and make the sun rise A i A E Sensor F Temp 96 85 X Exit 9 Menu ZOSO TR I aaa ooo K The Animation Instrument can be used in three modes 1 Connected to a data channel 2 Linked to another Instrument range and data channel 3 Linked to another Instrument Threshold In the first mode the animation instrument is simply connected to its own data channel and plays the frames from start to end according to the range settings you can manually enter under the Display Options amp Ranges The first frame will be played when the signal is at the at the bottom of the range the last frame will be played when the signal is at the end of the range All frames in between will be divided over the range In case of the sunset animation there are 100 images In JPG format Note the drawback of this method is that you have to know the exact range you want to use and have to set this range manually in the Display Options Mode 2 linked to another instrument s range This mode still uses a data channel to display the animation but now it uses the data channel and range of another instrument Right click the instrument and choose the option Link to Instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 193 Select Animation Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link te Instrument i Background amp Borders Display Options amp
229. n choose the option Explain this object Close The option will show a text box with information about the selected type of instrument object Press Escape to close this window Type of Object Linegraph with 1 Y scale Note that the first 15 items on the toolbar are the virtual instruments which can display physiological information Bargraph up to the Animation instrument The next 9 items are screen objects which display information text graphics video or capture sound and video A special case is the Game object which we will describe further down the manual If you want to leave the screen editor mode again simply press the E key once more or select the following option from the main menu 4 Biolrace Software for NexXus 10 Screen Sapa Configuration Help EditSceen e BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 167 Instruments Overview amp Functions On the toolbar you find the following instruments and objects Number Name Feedback Function 1 Bargraph Yes Displays 1 channel of data on a vertical graph 2Single Line graph Yes Displays up to 4 channels on 1 Y scale 3Dual Line graph Yes Display 2 channels on 2 Y scales Vernier 4 Instrument Yes Displays 1 channel of data on a horizontal graph 5Single Spectrum No Display a power spectrum of 1 channel 6 Dual Spectrum No Displays a power spectrum of 2 channels 73D FFT Spectrum No Displays a spectral
230. n gt Client lt John Sample gt The temperature at your finger tip normally is between 30 and 36 degrees Celsius During Vasodilation expansion of your bloodvessels skin temperature in the extremities usually increases i r x Button Cs 00 06 08 10 00 12 00 14 You will now see the object toolbar appear on the left side of the screen You can drag this toolbar to other positions if you wish Also you will see that the different objects a text object at the top a line graph instrument below it an image object at the left bottom etc all appear with selection handles around them You can position the object by left clicking the mouse on them and holding the mouse button down then move the mouse This is called dragging You can add virtual instruments or objects by clicking in the toolbar on an object and then clicking on the screen somewhere where there is space This will drop the object onto the screen leaving it to be sized to your preference Right clicking amp property menus Another major concept within the BioTrace software is that the properties of most objects that you see can always be edited by right clicking them For instance right click the text object that you see at the top A Property menu will drop down Enter Text Font Settings Select Image Close Delete Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctri y V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 42 Sele
231. n the documentation Let me choose my own passkey Lo Dont use a passkey D i should always use a passkey unless your device does not support one We ommend using a passkey that is 8 to 16 digits long The longer the passkey the more secure it will be Cancel Please select Use the passkey found in the documentation and enter the number Note that this key comprises of the last four digits of the serial number You can find this number on the label at the bottom of your NeXus On the former page you will notice that this serial number is shown Enter the four last digits of this number The example above shows 0095 but your passkey will be different Then press the Next gt button and wait for Windows to connect to your NeXus It will show a number of messages and finally a message that the device has been installed It may also reveal the COM port that is used to connect to the computer This should be a port in the range between COM1 COMS9 Press the OK button to finalize the installation All other devices Nexus 10 0928040095 Passkey enabled Note 1 In case the COM port is higher than COM or you need troubleshooting please refer to appendix I Note 2 The installation procedure is the same for NeXus 4 and NeXus 10 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 19 1 7 Step 7 Finalize the Installation After you have connected the NeXus to Bluetooth we adv
232. n to open the main menu and then select the Review Sessions and Clients button Review Sessions and Clients You can also press the O key on our keyboard to get here We will now load the session that we just recorded Click on the button above and you will see the session selection dialog box In case the screen selector comes up just cancel that Client and Session Database _ Enable Client Confidentiality Date Description Time Duration Sensors Channel Set used 6 15 2004 Sample session with bypjtm 12 48 20 00 05 21 EEG EMG EDR Default channel set 6 15 2004 2xEMG session 2 40 54 PM 00 02 24 EEG EMS EDR Default channel set 6 18 2004 RSP rate test 34 35 PM 00 01 09 EEG EMG EDR Default channel set 6f23 2004 EEG 1 Channel 12 57 55 00 03 14 EEG EMG EDR Default channel set giz6l2004 Oximetry amp RSP Session 2 20 37 AM 00 02 38 EEG EMS EDR Default channel set 1Of262004 Video Capture Test BYP 1 46 46 AM 00 01 00 EEG EMG EDR Default channel set OCS My First Session 51 50PM 00 00 29 EEG EMG EDR Default channel set lt gt Edit Client Show Session Notes Inter session Report LOAD session Delete Client 4dd new Client Delete Session Inter session Report Clinical Management On the left side you see the list of clients that are stored in your database On the right side you see a list of sessions for each client that you select Let s load the session by left clicking it with the mouse select the first column
233. nce Script Q Tip another quick way to open the screen editor is by pressing the E key on your keyboard Pressing the same E key once more will exit the editor mode When you are in the editor mode your screen will appear a little different because the background will appear in a grey color showing a grid and a floating toolbar BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt EMG 1 channel relaxation screen gt Client lt John Sample gt File Screen Configuration Help p m Menu ZSO CR E E oeo KT Tl TOT All the objects on the screen now appear with black handles around them indicating that you can move and size them BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 132 5 1 Modifying object properties Moving and sizing screen objects By dragging left clicking and holding the handles of the object you can size the object and make it bigger or smaller If you click on the middle of an object the mouse will change into a symbol with 4 arrows indicating you can move the object While you move the object the objects will snap to the grid unless you turn the grid OFF The grid settings can be found under the Screen part of the main menu bar E Biolrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt EMG 1 Edit Screen E Edit Sequence Script QO OFF No Grid ON Medium ON Fine i Show Full Screen F Show Hide Control Buttons Close
234. nd contact other NeXus 4 and NeXus 10 BioTrace users and exchange information or ask questions e Nexus10 Nexus Users Group Microsoft Internet Explorer BAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay O O HAO Pwo frome O 2 2 a DA Address http health groups yahoo com group Nexus 10 v Go i Links gt i Google G yocp E YF Bookmarksw PageRank R 100blocked Yr Check Y Autolink Settings Yahoo My Yahoo Mail Make Y your home page Search Search A Welcome nexusdeveloper1 YAHOO HEALTH Sign Out My Account P Health Groups Help gt Groups nexusdeveloper1 Erwin mindmedia nl Group Member Edit Membership Start a Group My Groups Nexus10 Nexus Users Group Home Messages Post Files Photos Description Links User and support group for Biofeedback therapists using the Database Nexus 10 system io We have created this group to support biofeedback Members therapists teachers and trainers who use the NeXus 10 Calendar BioTrace psychophysiology system We are clinicians and professional trainers who have introduced this system and others to hundreds of health professionals within our professional training seminars We enjoy using the NeXus 10 BioTrace system and are impressed by its power and cS Settings flexibility Group Information Our purpose for the group is to create a learning environment where questions on the use of this NeXus 10
235. ne graphs on a single time scale This way you get an overview of the activity of the all these channels during a live recording The session overview mode could display the same amount of channels but in that case the signals would be static The sample picture below shows 11 EEG channels consisting of the raw EEG signals and their band pass filtered derived channels ih ddy y AGNIS Mi ny HN Nu Nol lw Mi i Ni V WA Ny AW oben t Val Wy i yl Wy j Ay Mf wl AMAA Y WM N i i Nif Kf K i M 4 A Nee A wii fi Mh ny AW i y Y ly n M lii ay wt hy i yy sa fin i ih i h My i ie Mai ai M h N K bh Th M i AW A j f I auth a f N fh ry a E A A A A ee i vn th mf TUA vty T A f y Efed Aan i A y TINA A AAA AAA AA AAA Mi Vi y 7 iT Wee Fi i TA i pol f y y l T A In tj y al J JN iv AN I MAY VETAT a l y y 7 at aw th Ny yy Fi FAES Atz y f y A i J v j y la ail ray f i las i si AE ES T I T alla halls an AAN ann Ath AAA hahahahha jie Aaah aAA AAA AAAA AAAA Aa hy Aly Wy Vif AI anil yyw vey yw owen inal Mis ih iN reser Ne NTA AIL ALANYA AAN Manaan A AA AAAA AAAA AAAA AeA nnn hanaan 1 fina anana ht aA nnee A all till fir MITT Nils ae Aira mi nalts lie STETIT EN Alte Niall Aa aana AAAA aAA AAA ea ANA aAa RMA apila paraaan A aA AAA ne bane Adie Vporn dna aaralan aaa a aa aA ad A A aa a r a a EEE PE a EEE P ESA EN RESE ERER F HS fi M i A a f Nha fi A m AA A BMG Ter A A A ATATA ATA E A E 1 A j th A F Y
236. nel for input would then also become invalid Preparing and using Flash Memory Sessions NeXus is capable of not only acquiring live data and sending it in near real time to the computer through a wireless connection but it can also be used to store physiological data on an internal flash card BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 89 The way it works 1s like this 9 You insert the flash card SD format into the computer a flash card reader You open up the Sensor input configuration box You click on the Configure Flash Sessions button You select which sensor data you want to store You initialize the flash card You put the flash into the NeXus see hardware manual You switch the NeXus on hold the power button for 5 seconds NeXus runs for a few minutes to number of hours You press the power button for 5 seconds to turn the NeXus off 10 You put the flash card containing the data into the PC 11 You import the flash session into BioTrace through the Datebase dialog box See chapter 4 5 Note in case the NeXus is used in ambulatory mode the wireless data connection is switched off So let s now look at the initialization of a flash session It is quite easy Enter a flash card into you PC and click the Configure Flash Sessions button Configure Flash Sessions After pressing this button the following dialog box will appear Configure Flash Sessions Car
237. net or copy them from your own CD s Tip 5 use mp3 digitized sounds rather than CD sounds and music When using a CD you can only play a single track at once When using MP3 WMaA files you can play many up to 64 sounds at once mix them and do volume feedback control on them Note please observe the copyright limitations that may exist on video and audio materials Tip 6 you may want to enter screen notes When editing building a screen you can press the N key This will show the screen notes When you click the Edit button you can enter your own notes Save the screen after entering the notes Tip 7 use the Video files Complementary to this manual you can find information about using BioTrace and building screens under the Help option from the main menu bar Show Instruction Videos Read the Quick Start Manual Show Keyboard Shortcuts K In the video category number 6 you will find more video information and examples on this object Tip 8 use the Internet In September 2005 a user group was started on the NeXus Biotrace Check here http health groups yahoo com group Nexus10 If you have a question you may find the answer there BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 234 6 6 Building Protocols Building a protocol is nothing but a creating a series of screens that are connected linked in one or another fashion and will play in a certain sequence Think of
238. ng you can define that when a specific screen is shown it has to generate a new segment of a type that you define The sequence editor is one of the places where you can define this Marking Artifact Areas Artifact areas are special types of segments that mark a part of your session as being invalid When BioTrace computes statistics these artifact areas will be skipped You mark a new artifact area by selecting a segment left click and drag and choosing the Segment add artifact area option from the menu that appears when you release the mouse The Artifact segment will appear as a red cross hatched area Note that the data in the artifact area will not be deleted it is only marked as being artifact You can remove the artifact segment mark later on if you like BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 115 Deleting Segments When you want to delete a marked segment you can simply select the segment by left clicking on it The segment in the example below we selected an artifact area will now show black handles around it Next click the right mouse button and a drop down menu appears Relax Ectopic beat Segment options Delete THIS segment irs l l Delete ALL segments A Analysis Functions d ea kini Segment TYPE definitions oe Ren te Se VervVieW es aaah Sts s pis iiag Show Statistics for THIS segment a me Print Segment Data
239. nge the current screen move and size instruments and objects or create new objects You can also press the E key to activate this option Opens the sequence editor Here you define a list of screens that are played one after the other like a slide show The sequence is stored in a script file that can be loaded and started through a button object Page 63 Grid Set the size of the grid in the screen editor mode You can choose off medium or fine The grid is used to align instruments and object Show Full Screen Selecting this item will get rid of most of the Windows background and desktop options Sometimes these options are distracting while you are recording a session and you do not want to see them Selecting it once more will switch back to a Windowed screen Show Hide control buttons At the bottom of the BioTrace screen you will often see the session control buttons These are used to start stop and pause sessions You can activate or de activate these control buttons in here X Exit Menu STOP Replay li Record 4 bbli Close Secondary Screen Does what it says You cannot always see the secondary monitor from where you work so through this function you can close it Session Overview Switches between the real time screen and the session overview screen The real time screen shows the actual current data up to 30 60 seconds video images and generates the visual and auditory feedback The session overview
240. nimation object it would work the same way The instruments on the primary master screen would inhibit pause the video objects or other instruments just as well This ends the third example of screen building BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 233 6 5 Screen Building tips The screen editor and screen building features of BioTrace go pretty deep In order to help you further along the way here are a few more tips Tip 1 when creating clients screen for the secondary screen use a master screen that controls the inhibit factors Only place a few simple objects on the client screen such as a video file WMV MPEG AVI etc and perhaps a scoring instrument displaying the reward counter Tip 2 when building a protocol script first build all the screens in the protocol and name them in a structured way Then start building the hyperlinks buttons or the scripted sequence using these screens Tip 3 don t be afraid to use multiple inhibits You can set individual instruments to accept or ignore the inhibits in the Feedback Options and Threshold settings Enable Biofeedbact Peer rrr er errr rrr re rrr rrr rrr rrr Tip 4 get video files wmv mpeg avi from the Internet and download them into the BioTrace Video directory Because of copyright limitations there are only a few video files included on the software setup CD Same for MP3 files You can get them from many places on the inter
241. not display physiological data If you want to show physiological data in numerical form please choose the numerical instrument instead The Text Object properties can be opened by right clicking the object Background amp Borders Enter Text Font Settings such as the Logitech QuickCam yt of your computer Then start a Xus 10 recording Paste Ctrl V Beside the standard properties that most object use you can 1 Enter the text of the object 2 Define the Font size style and color Entering Text Choose the Enter Text option from the property menu The following dialog box will appear TEXT entry and settings Text alignment Inset all edges Multiple lines center text horiz wv 10 0 2 3 Multiline text contents Connect a WEBCAM such as the Logitech QuickCam Pro 4000 to the USB port of pour computer Then start a new Nesus 10 recording Use FADE_IN effect Display HELF test in here In this dialog box you can enter up to 2500 text characters BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 199 Text Alignment The alignment of the text also called justification defines how the text lines will be displayed You can choose from multiple or single lines and from left centered or right alignment Multiple lines center text horiz Multiple lines left align text Multiple lines center text horizonte Multiple les right align text Single line left align text Singl
242. ns a series of tasks stimuli that have generated markers or segments Switch to the session overview screen right click and choose the option Averaged Response Analysis from the Analysis Functions i Select Channels for Overview TE EE EE rE EEE Bf Event markers i pr i Pe o o i Segment options j i i i F T i n VEHI Analysis Functions HRV Analysis oo l Correlation Analysis Recompute Session Overview Averaged Response Analysis Compute Statistics re l l Artfact Rejection ee a a a a a a a Size of TIME axis i ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee a Close fF F F EF F F PF F EF EF F F F FE In the dialog box that pops up you need to enter the parameters the software will use to compute the Averaged Response Averaged Response Analysis During this analysis a number of responses epochs which are defined by markers or by segments are averaged together The result is an average response signal Evoked Potentials and SCPs require this technique to analyze and visualize results The CHANNEL signal to average EPOCHS are defined by Segments merge 2 types Select type of Ist segment Positive feedback 2nd segment type to merge 6 Negative feedback 3rd segment type to merge Size of the Epoch milliseconds 8 Sec Epoch Average plain data or spectral of data Average Plain data Use Inversed Polarity SCP neg is up Let s now look at these parameters
243. nstalled In ase you are using Windows XP we advise you upgrade your computer to Windows XP service pack 2 or get a newer compatible version of Windows XP before you install the Bluetooth drivers In case you have XP service pack 1 or older and cannot upgrade the Bluetooth installation procedure and drivers are different In case you have previously installed Bluetooth drivers under SP1 that work reliably you may decide to keep those drivers if they work for NeXus Note USB and BlueTooth installation for Windows 7 is described in the hardware manual XP SP2 driver installation Please turn your computer ON and put the supplied Bluetooth stick in this sample an MSI stick is shown in a free USB port From now on this USB port will be your NeXus Bluetooth port we advise you to always use this port and not change to other USB ports On notebooks we advise you use an extension cable so the USB stick will not be damaged when the notebook is tilted This extension cable may be short or up to 2 meters long Please note different types of Bluetooth interfaces may be supplied with your NeXus Therefore the brand and type of USB stick may look different than the one displayed above NeXus also runs with_LinkSys BlueTooth sticks V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 16 Now a balloon text will show at the right bottom of your monitor screen actual screen display may vary depending on type
244. nstrument Then you need to choose if you want to link to the threshold state or the range based state BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 219 Linking to the threshold state will advance the animation one frame every time the signal in the bargraph in this example goes over or below threshold For example this way you can make a flower animation open the flower for as long as the EMG level is below 2 microvolts Linking to a range based state will make the animation respond in a different way It will now show the first frame when the bargraph example level is at the lowest range and the last frame when at its highest level All the levels in between will also be indicated by the corresponding frames The Water Effect Instrument Linking the Water Effect instrument to another instrument will have the effect that it will use the data and range from the linked instrument So if you link to a bargraph that is displaying the EMG from 0 to 20 microvolts at the lower end of the bargraph scale below 5 microvolts or so the water ripples will almost disappear At the higher end the ripples will be stronger Linking the water effect instrument to another instrument provides you with more control over the range and sensitivity of the ripple effect The Game Instrument The game instrument usually needs to be linked to a number of instruments so you can use the signals from those instruments Below example settings
245. oTrace Data directory directly through the windows explorer Session backups all client and session data is stored in the BioTrace Data subdirectory In case you want to make manual backups you can compress and store the DATA subdirectory on an external storage device such as a DVD writer or network drive V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 50 3 4 Clients Sessions are always connected to a client You cannot store a session unless you select a client Before you record a new session you will always be asked to select a client first You can select and load clients and sessions through the client database TIP a quick and easy way to OPEN a client amp session is by pressing the O key on your keyboard Client and Session Database Enable Client Confidentiality Use DATA directory on networked drive Date Description Time Duration Sensors Screen used 15 6 2004 Sample session with by 12 48 20 00 05 21 EEG EMG EDR Screen 15 6 2004 2xEMG session 14 40 54 00 02 24 EEG EMG EDR Screen EEG 1 Channel 0 57 55 00 03 14 EEG EMG EDR Screen 26 10 2004 Video Capture Test BVP 1 48 00 01 00 EEG EMG EDR Screen 8 3 2005 EKG HR Session 18 12 59 00 05 08 EEG RSP Respiration and 9 3 2005 2xEEG SCP Recording 16 30 04 00 00 13 EEG EEG WEEG Screens EE LOAD session Edit Client Information Edit Session Notes Generate TREND report Clinical Management Delete Client Add Cl
246. object when editing a screen To copy an object move the mouse cursor over the instrument object and press Control and C You can also right click the object and select this option from the drop down menu Connect to data channel E Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Texts Font Settings Close Delete Paste Ctrl Paste the object Screen editor Undo changes up to the last 5 changes in the screen editor When you move a threshold left click and drag the mouse in an instrument while HOLDING the ctrl key all thresholds of other instruments using the same data channel will be updated Example this way you can change set all thresholds connected to EMG1 in all instruments to the same level V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 61 4 2 The Biolfrace Menu Bar Function Overview Apart from using the keyboard and shortcuts you will otherwise use the mouse and the standard Windows controls to operate the software In this manual we assume that you know how to operate the mouse and the standard Windows user interface so we will not describe its basic features such as minimizing maximizing a window or starting and closing applications You will find the main menu bar of BioTrace on top of the primary screen The blue bar above it is used to display the title or name of the scr
247. observe the measure of correlation between those signals Another advantage is that you can connect the pacer signal usually found at sensor J channel 10 to an instrument and use the biofeedback options in order to generate volume controlled digitized sound feedback Example for instance you could use an MP3 WMA sound file of music or nature sounds and control the volume of that sound by the pacer signal The sound volume would go down when you are supposed to breathe out and go up when you are supposed to breathe in By setting the inverse proportional option in the volume feedback settings you can change that to the other way around You find those options under the Digitized Sound WAV MP3 Feedback options of an instrument like the bargraph right click the bargraph to get there ABOVE Threshold Digitized Sound WAV MP3 w Edit Required TIME above 0 milliseconds V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 57 4 0 The user Interface main functions We will now describe the main functions of the USER INTERFACE There are two ways to operate BioTrace The first way is by using the mouse and selecting options from the main menu bar or from drop down menus that appear when you right click with the mouse The second way is by using keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts are a quick way to access most of the main functions such as for example loading a screen L o
248. ocus and receives the key presses When you want to edit the game settings you should right click the object just outside the border of the game BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 213 Right click here to open the property menu Select Game Link to Instrument Game Settings Background amp Borders Close After right clicking just outside the border a dialog box will appear where you can edit the settings of the game Define your GAME settings in here Connect your control to an instrument that drives the control sinc Instrument 2 SMR Control 2 V Speed of your ship 0 Slow 1is Fast lt No Link gt Control 4 Control 5 In the case of the space invader game there are only two controls 1 Control 1 fires shoots the laser gun at the bottom when the instrument is over threshold 2 Control 2 sets the speed of the laser gun ship at the bottom It will use the range of the linked instrument When the level is at the bottom of the range the speed will be slow when the level is toward the end of the range the speed will be fast Boolean and Variable controls The B in front of a control description means it is a Boolean control which is either true above threshold or false below threshold The V in front of a control description means it is a Variable control defined by the level of the signal within the range of the linked instrument BioTr
249. ological signals in the frequency range from DC to about 800Hz The following modalities are supported Type Recommended Sample rate SPS 1 EEG 256 or 512 2 SCP same as EEG 3 ECG 256 2048 4 EMG 1024 or 2048 5 EOG 256 Please note since the NeXus has the pre amplifiers built in selecting a different type here is basically only a matter of changing the labeling of the sensor If you for instance connect the second input Input B to an ECG signal it is not critical for the signal that the sensor is still labeled as being EEG The signal of the sensor in that case will not be affected and be just as valid If you decide to change all four inputs A D to EEG you could do so here In that case you would set the type of all sensors to EEG and set a sample rate of 256 or 512 samples per second For 4 channels of raw EMG you would change the type to EMG and set a high sample rate of 2048 or 1024 samples per second V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 86 On inputs E F G and H you can connect the peripheral sensors in any combination Options are Type Recommended Sample rate 6 Skin conductance 32 7 Skin Temperature a2 8 Blood Volume Pulse 128 9 Respiration 32 So 1f you decide to connect four different people to a single encoder for monitoring Skin Conductance you would set inputs E H all to SC GSR You would want to set the sample rate to 32 SPS and then save
250. om the Basic Screens category Screen browser LOADING a new screen Select a screen CATEGORY Select a SCREEN fram thumbnail image list below Da Basic Screens EEG Client Screens EEG Master Screens EEG Screens EMG screens Favorite Screens Migraine and Headache Multi Modality Screens IMyScreens Basic Skin Temperature Switching to the Editor Mode After the screen has loaded you can press the E key on your keyboard to enter the screen editor mode You will then see the screen canvas with grid and the object tool bar You can only edit a screen that is loaded as a primary screen p BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt Basic Skin Conductance screen gt Client lt John Sample gt D PI it 00 42 00 14 00 16 00 18 00 20 00 22 00 24 00 26 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 166 The Object Instrument Toolbar Once you are in the screen editor mode you use the object toolbar to add new instruments or objects to your screen You can move the floating toolbar around to any location within the primary screen and pick and choose instruments and objects from it You do this by left clicking on the object that you want to add then release the mouse button and click again somewhere on the screen canvas where you want to place the object If you right click the object a drop down menu appears and you ca
251. oose the Video Object Video Place it on the screen below the line graph Stretch and move the Video object so it will use of the space between and below the instruments Right click the video object and choose the Rabbitl wmv video file double click it BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 232 Select Video file Background amp Borders Pause VIDEO during INHIBIT Close Delete Copy Ctl Paste Ctrl V Make sure that you have set the Loop first video option so it will keep playing the video animation over and over Randomize List Close the dialog box Right click somewhere the screen between the instruments and set a background color on the screen Set background Colors option On your screen you should now see something like this 1 Biolrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt MyNewScreen screen gt Client lt John Sample gt SEE File Screen Configuration Help Replay Record 00 05 700 Press the E key to go out of the edit mode and choose the Save Screen option from the main menu bar Do not press the Escape button as that will leave the screen you are building and return to the main menu When you will Replay the session you will see that both the Theta Beta power and EMG artifact bargraph will inhibit pause the video animation When you would have loaded a secondary screen that displays a video or DVD Game or A
252. or NeXus 16 26 04 2006 EEG with movement 26 04 2006 EEG test 03 06 2006 tes Select the TYPE of DATA the trend report should use _ Use entire session to generate trend no segments Exdude reject data marked as ARTIFACT area Select ALL Select None Generate Report gt gt a You also need to select whether you want to generate a trend report on all the data of a session the entire session or only on a special segment type that you selected BioTrace will then analyze the sessions you want to trend and check with you which type of Segment you want trend V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 80 Using Segments in Trend Reports It is of course possible to use the data of an entire session to trend the mean level of a data channel like Theta Amplitude but that is not always useful Frequently you will have sessions where parts are for instance baseline and other parts segments may be the parts where the client is actually training or performing a certain task Those parts in a session can and should be marked as being of a specific segment type In the dialog box you can select this option Use a specific SEGMENT type to generate trend Select the TYPE of DATA the trend report should use Use entire session to generate trend no segments Use a specific SEGMENT type to generate trend Exdude reject data marked as ARTIFACT area The other option
253. or this data channel O OK Ay This data channel defines a raw EMG data channel containing EMG activity in the range between 20 and 500 Hz You can edit or change the following parameters here 1 The name of this channel 2 The source in this case the source is sensor input A 3 The data processing category in this case a digital band pass filter 4 The type and characteristics of the filter 5 The frequency range 6 The UNIT of the channel 7 The default color used in the session overview screen The order of the digital filter defines how strong the channel filters out signals outside the chosen range You can view the frequency response under the button marked with Show Frequency Response So you may ask yourself why define another channel for the raw EMG activity when we already have the sensor input C itself channel 3 Does it not make more sense to just plainly use Input C The answer is that the signal coming from sensor C contains much more information that we need for a standard EMG It contains activity in the range from DC OHz to 800Hz Therefore we create a new channel 34 which is sampled at 2048 SPS and contains only the activity in this smaller range 20 500Hz Note that in this case we do not use the DC contained in this signal TIP in case you want to set a narrower band pass on the raw EMG for instance to get rid of ECG activity you could set the frequency ran
254. oroughly tested Q3 Do other devices interfere with the NeXus Bluetooth A3 Very unlikely but possible in extreme situations For instance when there are many WiFi stations within range of the Bluetooth dongle they may slow down the communication Q4 Do I need to update my Bluetooth drivers regularly A4 We do not advise to update the drivers supplied with NeXus if they work as required We do advise strongly to use Windows XP SP2 or newer and use the supplied SP2 drivers Q5 Why doesn t the NeXus have a USB cable as a backup connection A5 Well does you mobile phone have a backup cable Millions of users are relying on wireless technology like Bluetooth and WiFi everyday and find a cable is really not required anymore Q6 What if my computer already comes with already comes with Bluetooth technology and a Bluetooth interface A6 In that case do not install the Bluetooth drivers from the BioTrace software package and do not use the Nexus Bluetooth dongle Your system should recognize the NeXus as a Bluetooth device Only in case your built in Bluetooth would not work disable it and use the supplied USB dongle and SP2 drivers In that case you need to have at least Windows XP SP2 service pack 2 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 285
255. ou connect The standard sensor configuration for the NeXus 10 is shown below Sensor Input and Samplerate configuration Select a SENSOR type for each input Samples per second Input A EEG InputB EEG InputC EMG raw InputD EMG raw InputE 32 SPS NeXus 10 Input F A Wireless BlueTooth InputG BV 128 SPS _ Unlock samplerates Input H Configure Flash Sessions InputI Oximetry oSpO2 Input Oximetry pulse We advise you to use this standard configuration for your standard applications and not change the sample rates of the default configuration However you can make your own channel sets with different configurations if you choose to do so As you can see here the EEG is sampled at 256 samples per seconds on input A and B We only need to use the signal to be in the range from 2 to 45 Hertz so let s see how this channel is defined V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 46 The standard configuration for the NeXus 4 is shown below Sensor Input and Samplerate configuration Input D InputE RSP Pacer Input F SUE tS Input H Please note that because the NeXus 4 has fewer inputs there more channel sets are required for the different sensor combinations Below you see the definition of the EEG1 input A raw signal It has been derived from the sensor input A which has been passed through a 3rd order band pass filter between 2 and
256. page you could link the instrument to the bargraph Automatically then it would use the range from 0 10 microvolt that this bargraph is currently using LINK to input from another instrument By LINKING to another instrument you can use its THRESHOLD or RANGE based state to drive an animation or show statistics aph lt EMG level gt 3 Water effect lt Relawation make the water still gt This is a secondary screen get LINK from PRIMARY screen When you change the range on the bargraph by clicking in the control buttons this change would immediately apply to the Water Effect Instrument as well BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 184 Display Options and Range Settings p Y scale RANGE o 00 10 00 Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment Auto FIT to MIN Mads Auto FIT to O Mad Auto CENTER maintain range FFT Frequency range FFT Epoch size Show FFT statistics Smoothing Data TypeStats Instrument Style Display options 1 Display options 2 Horrnal Waves Other options you can set on this instrument Smoothing dampens sudden changes in the signal amp ripples 1 Direction when inversed the ripples slow down when the level goes up 2 Wave Speed sets the waving speed of the water ripples Instruments the Numerical Instrument The 12th object on the toolbar is the Numerical Instrument In the simplest case this instrument dis
257. picture above shows a larger scale font on an FFT Spectrum instrument that has been changed through font settings BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 147 Properties Feedback Options amp Thresholds This is the place where you control all biofeedback settings for those instruments that support a threshold Examples are the Line graph the Bar graph the Zoomer and the Vernier instruments Right click the instrument and choose the Feedback Options amp Thresholds as shown below Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Title Text s Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds This will bring up the Biofeedback and Threshold settings dialog box Biofeedback and Threshold Settings ABOVE Threshold Midi Tone feedback Edit Required TIME above o milliseconds Required TIME below Threshold 1 Level Auto Threshold 1 Target Percentage Threshold 2 Level This dialog box controls the following properties 1 The audio biofeedback settings above in between and below thresholds 2 The Inhibit settings 3 The Threshold levels and auto thresholding criteria BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 148 The Biofeedback Settings Above and Below As you can see in the dialog box on the former page you can set feedback options for activity above and below threshold In t
258. plays the current value of a data channel Sensor E EDR GSR 6 11 The instrument updates once every second When you right click the instrument you can choose a number of options BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 185 Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings 1 Connect to data channel tells the instrument to display channel data 2 Edit data channel edits the data channel settings 3 Link to Instrument tells the instrument to display the percentage above or below the threshold of the other instrument 4 Color settings changes the color of the text and text background 5 Display options and ranges changes the instrument Style 6 Title text sets the text show on top of the instrument 7 Font Settings changes the FONT of the instrument Most of these options are common to the other instruments and have been discussed in the earlier chapters Let s look at the special features of this instrument Displaying Statistics When the numerical instrument is connected to a data channel it can display the current Actual Value or it could display a statistic Min EMG1 Mean EMG1 Max EMG1 0 97 10 43 129 49 In the example three numerical instruments are shown all connected to EMG amplitude channel The first instruments shows the minimum level the se
259. port Session Data Exit The Screen menu items Configuration Help PEN Screen Edit Screen Edit Sequence Script Co arid Show Full Screen CF Show Hide Control Buttons Close Secondary Screen Session Overview TAB Edit Screen Edit Sequence Script V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 This opens the Client and Session database Use this to load a session You can also press the O Key to activate this option Here you save the current channel set after you have made changes to it or after you have created a new channel set A channel set contains all the definitions of the sensor inputs and data processing functions Use this function to load a previously saved channel set The software will ask you if you want to attach this channel set to the current screen If you confirm with yes the screen will always load the channel set you just selected to that screen This option will print the current session overview and Statistics Same as above but now with a preview Define your printer setup in here You can change options such as size and orientation portrait of landscape through this function Through this function you can export your session data or parts of it to an ASCII file that can be read and imported by Microsoft Excel SPSS or MatLab This will exit the BioTrace application This will switch to the screen editor where you can cha
260. put rate it will mean your faster channel will be down sampled and data will be lost A short sample of EXPORT output data is shown below note that slow sensor data is repeated RAW Data export file tab separated Client Jonn sample Session Sample session with bvp tmp sc rsp temp Date 6 15 2004 Time 12 48 20 PM Direc Poms ol Seconds Output rate 128 Samples sec DSM Ss 92 OPS LAO SPS 32 SES TIME Sensor F Temp Sensor G BVP HR BVP O0Z00229 36 144 O21g474 GISIN 007002 36 1544 625 090 G7 e965 VOUS 29 Joeda HOZOsIO OleJoOo O02 00229 26 144 O20 000 PIGA OOTO 136 144 506007 JG 4965 OOTUSI 365144 6555000 674965 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 120 4 11 Session Overview Analysis Functions In the session overview screen mode you have access to a number of special functions beside the statistical functions The way to get to these functions is by right clicking the overview screen and choosing the option Analysis Functions ANNAN Select Channels for Overview Event markers segment options Analysis Functions HRV Analysis Oo Correlation Analysis Recompute Session Overview ue B Averaged Response Analysis Compute Statistics Artifact Rejection Size of TIME axis YYYY You can use these functions without selecting a segment In that case the software will select the entire session and assume the function
261. r is to score the training result It is a way to observe progress during a session At the start of a session the reward counter is always reset to 0 An example of an increment above threshold is shown below Biofeedback and Threshold Settings We advise to set a Required Time of at least 100 ms or the counter will run very fast For instance setting it to 500 ms would mean that for every second that the criterion has been met and there are no inhibits the counter would be incremented twice How to display the reward counter So how do we use and display the reward counter Take a look at the following example Theta Inhibit SCORE Rewards 24 Theta below threshold increments the reward counter In this example the reward counter will be incremented when Theta activity is below threshold A numerical instrument is used to display the counter Other instruments that could be used as well are the Bargraph Vernier and Zoomer instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 158 Change the display options property of these instruments so they will show the reward counter rather than a data channel To open the display options right click the instrument and choose Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Texts Font Settings Close In the display options dialog box click on
262. r more instruments that use 1 channel and have a Y Scale range The following Instrument can be used Bar graphs Vernier Instruments Zoomer Instruments and Line graph Instruments You will then link one or more of these Instruments to the properties of the layers The level of the signal displayed in the Y Scale range of the linked Instrument will then drive the Layer property In the example on the former page the Theta Amplitude is driving the size of Layer 2 So when Theta has reached the maximum range of the Instrument Layer 2 will have the largest size See the example below Theta at max means Size is large A Theta amplitude Theta at min means Size is small So effectively the position of the signal level within the range of an Instrument is used to drive the Size Brightness or Rotation speed of the Mandala layer Make sure that after you are ready making changes to the Mandala you save the screen Instruments the Zoomer Instrument The 14th object on the toolbar is the Zoomer Instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 191 This instrument display an expanding rectangle or circle rather like the way a bargraph shows a vertical bar that moves up and down The graph of the Zoomer instrument moves expands contracts in all directions Below an example is shown of a rectangle Zoomer displaying the Alpha Amplitude and another Zoomer instrument with circle displaying the relative bloo
263. r opening a session O We will now present an overview of these functions 4 1 Shortcut keys and on the fly screen switching In order to see a list of the available keyboard shortcuts you can use a single key Press the K key on your keyboard to see a quick list and overview of all the available keyboard shortcuts You will see the following dialog box Overview of the KEYBOARD SHORT CUT keys GENERAL shortcut keys SCREEN shortcut keys F112 Escape Main menu F1 WEEG Screensi 1xEEG Multi Spectral Bands no auto 2creen E EDIT mode 2 WEEG Screensi2xEEG with Brain Mirror screen Ke Keyboard Shortcuts 3 WEEG Screens EEG 1 channel signal check screen QF Sequence editor s WEEG Screens Theta Inhibition and SMR Training screen Mi MultiHhedia control FS Basic Screens Migraine Vasoconstriction Training screen OF Open Session Database F Skin Temperature Temperature with Flower Animation screen Load a Screen i Reepiration and HRV HR BYP with frequency analysis screen Refresh screen D okin Temperatures Temperature with OVD feedback screen W Screen Notes g Skin Temperatures Temperature with Sunset animation screen F Full screen mode Mutihodality Screens EMG EDR SC BYP Temp screen T Channel Set i Migraine and HeadacheiWasoconstriction Training with Animati T Sensor INPUT configuration EMG screens 1xEMG training with FB increase levels screen Enter enter Event marker gt auto Event mar
264. r size Base epochs on SEGMENTS Show Max values Show Min values w Show Mean values Show Std deviations Show Coeff of Var Show RAW samples in this case means that the data is showed without any processing In the overview screen this means the data 1s compacted to 4 samples per second when looking at parts of the session that are greater than 60 second Show N second statistics means that the data is summarized over segments of 5 10 30 seconds and more This is the option you want to choose in order to view trends in the data Show Max Min Mean etc indicates what statistic will be used for the summary statistics Choose Max in this case will imply that the trend of the maximum levels within an n second statistic will be shown Option 4 Y Scale Range settings Each channel that is displayed in the overview mode requires a Y scale that is shown on the left side of the screen In the following picture the Y scales are indicated by the arrows AS with any instrument that displays physiological data you must set some kind of range so the signals will be visible and scaled properly 100 0 HR BYP Max values 200 0 190 0 170 0 BWP amplitude Max values 10 Sec epoch BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 109 In many cases you will set an automatic range but in other cases you may w
265. r than 1 second Did it work If it did now is a good time to save the screen by choosing Save Screen It will use the screen file name and category that you selected earlier BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 226 6 3 Example 2 building a Screen with an Animation We will now build a basic Animation Screen As you have read earlier animations are usually driven by thresholds of linked instruments We will not start from scratch but instead modify the EMG screen we just made Press E on your keyboard to enter the screen editor mode Now move the toolbar to the right of the screen by dragging it using the caption Then select the Animation Instrument and place it on the screen Move the bargraph and numerical instruments to the left Your screen should now look something like this s as aes Object Toolbar Select channels lt Default channels gt 16 A Beta Waves 17 Gamma Wave B 18 B Theta Wave 19 B Alpha Wave 20 B SMA Wave 21 B Beta Wave 22 B Gamma wave 23 A Theta amplitude 24 A Alpha amplitude 25 4 SMF amplitude 26 A Beta amplitude 27 amp Gamma amplitude 28 B Theta amplitude 29 B Alpha amplitude E 30 B SMA amplitude 31 B Beta amplitude 32 B Gamma amplitude 33 HA BVP 34 EMG1 raw 35 EMG2 raw 37 EMG2 Ampl 38 EMG1 EMG2 39 EMG1 EMG2 40 BYP amplitude 41 Ayv DC EEG 49 CTD Select 1 data channe
266. re a way of marking selected areas in a session A session may consist of different phases or activities that need to be distinguished from each other An example is for instance the difference between the beginning e g baseline and the rest of a session E g stressor or some type of activity Often we want to observe what physiological changes occur during different phases tasks or activities E BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt Respiration Rate screen gt Client lt John Sample gt File Screen Configuration Help a Segment add Segment gt mT Segment compute Statistics r Segment add Artifact area Segment TYPE definitions Analysis Functions Zoom SELECTED data Export SELECTED data Close X Exit 6 Menu S STOP Repay 11 Record oz32000 ZER s Start E G aj BioTraceQuickStart fm BioTrace RC1 BioTrace Software f CFR E 9 E Each activity is marked in the session as being of a certain type We call such a marked area a segment A segment may be only seconds long or last several minutes So how do we define segments You define a segment by pointing with the mouse to the start of the segment clicking the left mouse button and dragging the mouse to the right This is called selecting a segment The selected segment is highlighted with a black background When you release the mouse a drop down menu will appear presenting
267. red TIME below milliseconds Every time the Theta level is below threshold for 250 ms the counter will be incremented The numerical instrument at the bottom is connected to Theta but shows the Reward Counter because of its Data Type Stats setting Data Type Stats Show the REWARD counter s So you see from these examples that the numerical instrument can be used in many ways Instruments the DirectX Plug in Instrument The 13th object on the toolbar is the DirectX Plug In Instrument BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 188 Plug In instruments are ways to expand BioTrace with new powerful Graphics and Instruments without having to change the Software As new software technology becomes available you can add these Plug Ins to your system These plug ins will be available from Mind Media but also from other developers The main purpose of Plug In instruments is to offer new interesting Graphics and Special Effects that offer alternative ways to visualize the Physiological Signals Each of these plug ins will have their own specific properties and settings so we can t discuss those here but we will now take a look at the default Plug In that comes standard with BioTrace The Mandala Plug In A sample screenshot is shown below Biolrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt EEG1 Theta Inhibition with Mandala screen gt Client John Sample gt File Screen Configurat
268. ries with only those files that you use in your protocols Then right click the protocoll folder and choose Send to compressed zipped folder Now all your protocol files with be in the right directories and you can send the entire protocol as one file to another person by email That person then just needs to open the compressed ZIP file and copy the contents to their Biotrace directory Difficult Yes we understand it if you think this is not so easy It indeed requires laborious manual copying and pasting of files in Windows Explorer In the future an automated function may become available which will make your life easier BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 239 6 7 Protocol Building tips Protocol building resembles creating a slide show except that you now have many more options to jump from slide to slide and even have the user navigate between screens at will or have screens popup only when certain physiological conditions are fulfilled It is outside the scope of this manual to discuss all the possible combinations of screens scripts and protocols you could possibly build with BioTrace but we do hereby provide you with some tips Tip 1 when creating a protocol always put all the screens belonging to your protocol in a single screen category Give that screen category a recognizable name for instance Relaxation Protocol1 Tip 2 first create all the screens images sounds and materia
269. rt supporting a minimum resolution of 320x240 and a built in microphone Logitech has good Webcams 2 You should not forget to install the Webcam software and drivers 3 There should be enough free hard disk space to store the captured video 10GB or more free space is recommended Alternatively you can use a firewire connection or a video capture card PCI or capture device USB that you connect to an external analog or digital video camera When you capture video the files will be compressed by BioTrace but still may become quite large Typically they use to 2 Mb per minute Because video capture uses a lot of hard disk space and it puts a lot of processing load on the CPU we advise the following 4 Use the default 320x240 resolution This is sufficient for most purposes 5 Use the 384 Kbit sec video quality which is suitable for most purposes 6 Get a webcam with built in microphone or connect an external microphone BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 271 8 4 Configuring your computer for Storage amp Backup The data files that BioTrace produces are stored in high 24 bit resolution Each data sample will take up 4 bytes of space on your hard disk therefore your data files may get quite large For example storing a single channel of EEG acquired at 256 SPS will use about 60 Kilobytes per minute Video capture files need even more space although they are compressed and typically only need
270. s either Theta or Beta or both reaches an Inhibit state by going over threshold the result will be that the SMR feedback instrument will pause its feedback but the Alpha instrument will continue it s feedback activity When you want a video instrument to ignore the Inhibit All you uncheck the Pause VIDEO during INHIBIT option TE _ Select Video file Background amp Borders v Pause VIDEO during INHIBIT Close Delete Copy Ctri c p Paste Ctrl V BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 152 Biofeedback Threshold levels amp Auto thresholds In the bottom part of the Feedback Options amp Thresholds property dialog box you can enter the threshold levels for threshold 1 and threshold 2 Threshold 1 Level Auto Threshold 1 ON for first minutes Target Percentage TIME above TH1 Threshold Level Enable Biofeedback _ Ignore Inhibit All Manual thresholds Generally you will set thresholds manually In that case you simply enter a value in the threshold 1 or 2 level box Note you can only set the threshold 2 level when you have set a check mark in the Enable Threshold 2 field Automatic threshold In some cases you will use an automatic threshold for a certain part normally the beginning of a session You have to enter a target percentage that tells the computer how much the threshold 1 the auto function does not work on
271. s 270 8 3 Configuring your computer for Video Capture ccccccccssssssssssssscccoees 271 8 4 Configuring your computer for Storage amp Backup ccccsssccccccecssseees 272 Recommendations for data Storage ccccccccsssssssseccececeeeeeeseseeecceeeeeseesseeeeeeees 212 Restoring a DACKUP sesesasstnisecoasusieersce sation e e a a Ee 274 8 5 LiveUpdate Updating BioTrace over the Internet ssscsssseeooees 275 8 6 Installing the Old Bluetooth drivers ccccccccsssssssssssssssssssssscssccccccsssssees 277 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 7 1 0 Installation of the Software CONGRATULATIONS by choosing NeXus 10 NeXus 4 with BioTrace software you have purchased leading edge technology These platforms feature a rich set of advanced functions as well as an easy entry into the world of physiological monitoring and feedback This first chapter offers you a step by step approach to the BioTrace software installation The second chapter contains directions to get you started with using the basic functions of the system Enjoy 1 1 Step 1 Check your Computer BioTrace requires the Microsoft Windows Operating System OS We strongly advise you to use Windows 7 or newer versions of Windows In case it is not possible for you to use Windows 7 or a newer version of Windows you may choose to use Windows XP SP2 Vista is not recommended
272. s and is switched on 2 Make sure the sensors are plugged in In this case we will use the skin conductance and or skin temperature sensor These are easy sensors to start with For the NeXus 10 you plug the skin conductance sensor into INPUT E and the temperature sensor into INPUT F For the NeXus 4 this will be INPUT C D Please will note that the connectors are marked with a red dot Input E amp F on the NeXus 10 mark I Input C amp D on the NeXus 4 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 32 When you plug in the connectors the red dots will be UP as shown on the picture above For this example it does not matter if you have both sensors you could also plug in just one sensor Put the SC and Temp sensor on the non dominant hand To find the information regarding which inputs are used by which sensors you find this the menu bar top left of the screen under configuration as displayed in the picture below you can also press the I key on your keyboard E Biol race Software for NeXus 10 Screen File Screen Began Help Sensor Input configuration T Channel Set definition Ch MultiMedia DVD Control M This is an example of how you could attach the SC and Temp sensors to your hand Notice that the SC skin conductance electrodes are placed on the inside of the fingertips and the temp skin temperature sensor is placed underneath white tape The tape ensures that
273. s incremented when the Theta level is below 10 microvolts for longer than 250 ms In a former session that took 5 minutes a score of 700 points was reached For the next session we can now use the same scoring mechanism by setting a goal of 750 points If a better counter score has been reached we know that effectively the theta level has been below threshold for a longer period BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 159 Biofeedback Digitized Sound and Music WA V MP3 This option plays digital sound and music files in the WAV MP3 and WMA formats Biofeedback and Threshold Settings ABOVE Threshold Edit Required TIME above o milliseconds The advantage of digitized sound is that you can use it for multiple conditions and in multiple instruments For instance one instrument will play some digitally recorded flute music when the EMG is below threshold while another instrument plays the digitized sound of wind and water when the skin conductance is below another threshold on another instrument In others words you can mix as many sounds in as many instruments as you like Note that this feature has a clear advantage over some of the other media used for biofeedback such as MIDI songs and the CD player In those cases you can only run one instance You can t play 2 tracks at once from the same CD When you click on the Edit button the following dialog box
274. s selected The Button Object is described in this same chapter BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 200 Selecting the Font style size and color When you right click the text object you can select the font settings of the objects Connect a WEB Ssn a Logitech QuickCam Pro 4000 to the UJ rontsettings Mputer Then start a ma Select Image rd n g i Close Note that you can select the font in the screen editor mode but also in the normal mode Real time mode The following standard Windows Font selector box will be shown on the screen From this box you can select 1 The Type of Font 2 The Style of the Font Regular Bold etc 3 The Size of the Font 4 The Color of the Font Note the font size will be scaled when the window that contains the screen 1s sized BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 201 Objects the Image Object The 18th object on the toolbar is the Image Object i This object does not display physiological data It displays a static image that can be used for instruction as information or as a background image An example of a screen containing two image objects is shown below reen gt Client lt John Sample gt x DIO aCe SOTLWale TOF Nes File Screen Configuration Help To measure the BVP the sensor is placed on the middle finger of your left or non dominant hand Connect the plug to the input G of the NeXus 10 Nex
275. se two channels have been selected indicated at the bottom namely channel 8 the respiration sensor and channel 33 the computed HR We will now add a third one channel 39 Respiration rate Scroll down in the list and highlight channel 39 Then press the OK button Fie Screen Configuration Help Sensor tt RSP Max values HR BVA Max values BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 105 You will now see that at the bottom the channel 39 has been added Changing the way a channel is displayed In some cases you want to see the actual signal such as respiration as a line graph In other cases it may have advantages to display the activity of a channel over time in another form such as in bar graphs forming a histogram The histogram would typically display the mean or maximum level of a signal over time in steps of 5 or 10 seconds This way it is far easier to recognize trends Let s modify the display type of the respiration frequency channel You can access the properties of a channel by right clicking on the scale of the channel you want to change So in this case right click on the scale of channel 39 and you will see a drop down menu appear Select channel s Display Type Data Type Statistics Show RAW data samples Y Scale range Show 5 second statistics Threshold Show 10 second statistics Show 30 second statistics Show 1 minute statistics other size Close Ba
276. se epochs on SEGMENTS Show Max values RSP Rate Meany Min values w Show Mean values Show Std deviations Show Coeff of Var First change the Data Type Statistics to 10 second statistics of the type Mean values Then change the Display Type to Bargraph 3D 12 5 Select channel s Lnegraph Lae Data Type Statistics gt Linegraph with markers Bargraph 2D aang iv Barareh v Bargrapn 3D Threshold gt 5 Close RSP Rate Mean values 10 Sec epoch 00 00 30 01 01 30 02 02 30 oy 03 30 04 After you make this change you will see a 10 second trend of the mean respiration rate over the entire session instead of the respiration rate line graph you saw before BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 106 If you want to keep this change save this screen See the FILE menu 4 Biolrace Software for NeXus 1 a Screen Configuration Help Build New Screen Save Screen Ctrl 5 Save Screen As Note when you SAVE a screen all screen settings of both the real time mode AND the overview mode are saved They are saved in one and the same file Setting the size of the Time Axis You can set the size of the time axis by using the and keys on your numerical keyboard These will expand and contract the time scale by a factor 2 Another way to set the size of the time axis is by right clicking the overview screen and choosing the s
277. seeeeceeeeeeseaeseeeeeees 102 4 10 Session Overview Screen Mode cccccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees 103 Adding channels to the overview sereen ccccecccceesseeseeceeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeeeeeeaaas 104 Changing the way a channel is displayed ccccccccccccccesssseeeceeeeeeeseeeeseeeeees 106 SCHine the Size OF Ihe MMEA Sauni cca tenant S 107 Overview Channel display OPUOUS ies ste nineties nictaatet take ieee E atest 108 Selecting and Markina Seo ment sreca E a tel eenian teas 111 Computing StatisticS ON a Semeni serrian ennaa na inr EAEE Ei ED 112 Pinin mestatisiC enesenn aemeetiebsded iactuentassaiee nau meeseehaletnasiens 113 Adding Segments Manually scsicccce sn astesaccdccesiandetveiaadiedandwasdadaancctsiaededeasacdeadaness 114 Computing statistics on multiple segments ccc ecccccccensseeeeseceeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeees 114 Addins Seements Automatically asss E EE 115 Mark ME PAU ACE AT CAS oases aa a a ie rt tied dno were seaute aiden 115 Pelting SC MS NES oi hereian Hees occ tations ecm oa acne naw ve decent sea tiaees 116 Defining and adding your own Segment TYyPpeb cccccccsseseesecceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeees 116 Defining and Adding Event Markers ccc cceccssccccccccceesseeeecceeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeees 118 Deleting and Renaming Event markers 0 0 0 ccccccccccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaasseeeeeees 118 Exporting Session Data eseni E 119 4 11 Session Overview Analysis Functions
278. sense Imagine you Start of with the default channel set where channel 33 is a HR heart rate channel and suddenly change the entire channel set in the middle of a session to another where channel 33 is some kind of EEG activity That clearly would not be possible because it would completely change the meaning of this channel and the sensor it would be connected to That would render your session data statistics and overview useless In other words during the recording of a live session you can change screens but the channel set you have selected can not change Connecting and Linking Instruments In most cases an instrument like a bargraph or line graph is simply connected to a data channel In that case the instrument will show the data of that channel Some instruments though can be linked to another instrument This means that it will use the threshold state or data and scale range of the other instrument Examples are 1 The Numerical Instrument 2 The Animation Instrument 3 The Water Effect Instrument 4 The Game Instrument Numerical Instrument When you link the numerical instrument you can make it display the percent time above below threshold Or when linked to an animation you can make it display the amount of frames or cycles that the animation has played Instrument Style Display above threshold Display options 1 Display above threshold Display below threshold Display options 2 Display
279. ses the raw EMG is measured only below 200 or 300 Hz for instance 100 200Hz In that case a sample rate of 1024 SPS would be fine to use For the other signals skin conductance temperature and respiration we are measuring signals that contain information that is mostly below 4 Hz so theoretically a sample rate of 16 SPS would be enough However it can t hurt to have a little more bandwidth Also the refresh rate where the eye does not perceive individual samples frames anymore is above 20 Hz Therefore we have selected 32 SPS You could go as high as 128 SPS on those sensors if you want to For the BVP sensor this is a little different Because this sensor is used for heart rate computations we want that HR data to have a higher resolution Setting a higher sample rate on the BVP pulse waveform will provide a greater precision in computing the distances between individual R peaks which are used to compute the HR So we choose 128 samples per second V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 88 Why powers of 2 on the sample rates Using a power of 2 based sample rate has the advantage that you can always divide back the sample rates in integer numbers 1 2 4 8 16 32 etc It also makes it easier to plot an EEG signal sampled at 256 SPS over against a respiration curve that is sampled at 32 SPS Since monitor screens only come in types that have integer numbers of pixels for instance 1280x
280. sesevenseddneseesesevevevedeeceeSeseveneosenes 240 7 0 Data Processing amp Analysis Functions eesssesssssssseessssssseeececccssseeeeeccccssssseeeeeeeeo 242 Catesones Or ala Process n eestaemie ee eardnea ersten 242 7 1 Linear Algebra Functions sssssssseececcccssssccceeccossssccceccoossssccceeecsssssscceeesosssse 243 yaN e 6100 eana wert kere mor Teren Trnr ener rrr ern Seen mor Teren yrrry rere 243 UDG AC OM eg daiea at exesuocddesadancenes a a Sebedu iad exes yuct Waahaacdnes Sebetuines 244 INV UE DIC ALON esos casinos asada vat E ce ale anne aca 244 IDI akS 0 oeeeeee erent ener oer E nt Con Ser NS 245 PAGS scoters eaianacte Seceacem E N cunpimaatase ee senescence cnnate 245 SUD EAC MOM WTC O eia ess airs a A A Ocala coasted 246 Tea WVOVEAU FIETS osere E A EEE a 247 HR Ana FIR O aeea e a E TAR 248 Some frequently asked QUESTIONS seriata a a E a 249 Displaying the Filter Frequency Response cccccccccesseeeeeeceeeeeceaaeeseeeeeees 292 7 3 Coherence and Correlation Functions ssssssssesceeececcccccocossssssessececeecceessssso 253 PEG CODO TCNCE mesine nn a E a E cetctontaudadtace 253 Core RHO arash hcasaectieaae th hones hee tae ceed ial adi Agusta 254 1A General SIGNAL PROCESSING escroissir eean a a eeraa 255 RM SAMPIO Caserna r mre Mee Mir rrrrrenr Tren nee 255 Correcting noise 7 RMS Zeroing ieia ei a a a Wbetacunes 257 Zeros EMG tms amplitudes oac e E EE 258 Memm Amph eee E sade Seaue sun auaheseteocmtactautecd
281. sion button to activate this function The Session import dialog box will appear Import Single Sessions from BioTrace BioGraph MultiT race Through this dialogbox you can import sessions from MultiTrace and compatible software Select the DATA subdirectory the dient directory and then the consegutive sessions you want to import Importing may take up to several minutes per session Enter the PATH of the DATA directory below lt lt Browse DATA Directory Old Database Select CLIENT Select 1 or more SESSIONS from the list to import Peter Silie 2000 03 04 2 x Potential Sensor Stresstest 1998 09 25 1 x EKG Herzrate und IBI 2000 09 27 2 x EMG RSI Tastatur amp Maus 2000 09 27 2 x EEG Baseline Aktivitaet 11 Minuten 2000 09 27 1 x EEG SMR Training mit Theta 2000 09 27 BYP RSP Atmung RSA Training 2000 09 27 5 Sensoren Protokoll Stressdiagnostik 2000 09 27 4 x EMG Kopf und Armbewegung 2000 10 24 EEG Impuls Add CLIENT to new Database i IMPORT selected Session s l Before you can import the old session format files you will need to enter the location of the DATA directory that was used to store these session files In case of the older 16 bit BioGraph Software version 2 X this may for instance be C BioGraph Data Use the Browse DATA Directory button to set this location Once the location has been set correctly the clients found in the old database format will b
282. size of the FFT Epoch 1 2 4 8 or more seconds This depends on the sample rate of the signal source For EEG the sample rate normally is 256 SPS 3 The frequency range In the example above 8 12 Hz Alpha has been selected Please note that you should select at least a range of 4 Hertz when using 1 second epochs or 2 Hz when using 2 second epochs BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 253 Correlation This function uses a Pearson product moment to compute the linear correlation between two signals The signals must have the same sample rate A good example for the use of this function is the measure of correlation synchrony between the respiratory activity and the heart rate An example of the correlation settings for RSP and HR activity Signal source 1 Signal source 2 Category of data processing Type of computations Subtype or Farameter 16 Sec Epoch The parameters you can set are 1 Signal source 1 and 2 must have the same sample rate 2 The size in seconds of the samples that should be analyzed If the sample rate is for instance 32 SPS setting a 16 seconds epoch means that 512 points of data will be analyzed Below the overlapping graphs of the respiration and HR signals are displayed The numerical instrument at the bottom show the level of correlation which also may be called synchrony or coherence in this case Respiration Heart Rate RSP HR Coherence In this
283. sor to your body Let s try out the first demo protocol that shows a signal from the BVP blood volume pulse sensor Select the button that says BVP and HR sensor demo When you move the mouse over this button you will see an explanatory text appear on the right side of the screen Now click the button You will first see an introductory screen that displays the position of the BVP sensor on the fingers Click on the NEXT gt gt button V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 25 Next you will see an active BVP signal This protocol demonstrates the NeXus BVP Sensor The Blood Volume Pulse sensor is based on the principle of photoplethysmography It emits near infrared light through the tissue skin and measures the absorption of this light by the blood flowing through the vessels Every time the heart beats the sensor detects a peak in this absorption An example of this pulsed signal is shown below The height A of the pulse defines the measure of relative bloodflow When the bloodvessels contract this is called vasoconstriction when they expand it is called vasodilation The interval or distance B between the peaks defines the heart rate HR which can be expressed as a millisecond MS interbeat interval or as the number of beats per minute BPM also called pulse rate Click on lt lt Back to return or on Next Screen gt gt to cor to the BVP se
284. source 1 Sensora EMG raw Signal source 2 Category of data processing Frequency Analysis FFT Type of computation Median Frequency Subtype or Parameter 1 Sec Epoch 10 00 to Hz Key rd When median or mean frequency is used for EEG it can be used to visualize slowing of the EEG EEG Spectrum Mean 9 2Hz Median 7 5Hz Dom 7 OHz The Vernier Instrument above shows the median frequency between 5 and 20Hz which is currently around 10Hz When the EEG slowing occurs the arrow would move to the left towards the Theta range Note the Spectrum above also shows the median frequency as a numerical value but now in range from 0 20Hz Note that you have to set the range within which the median frequency will be computed BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 265 Dominant Frequency This function computes the dominant or peak frequency of a signal in the provided frequency band This simply finds the Hz value in the Spectrum that has the highest peak The dominant frequency is much less stable than the mean or median frequency The dominant frequency tends to hop back and forth between lower and higher frequencies EEG Spectrum Mean 19 0Hz Median 14 0Hz Dom 6 0Hz J Mean Frequency This function computes the mean frequency of a signal in the provided frequency band The mean and median frequency usually behave in much the same way The difference is that
285. ssion with a Hyperlink to a new screen Not all combinations will be valid though Obviously it does not make sense to combine the option Record Session with the action Stop Session In most cases you will use button action Selecting Screens Sessions and Script files Hyperlinks dick to select SCREEN Protocols screen Click to select SESSION to load lt none gt Click to select SCRIPT lt none gt BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 206 Use the buttons shown on the former page to select 1 The screen file to load when hyper linking 2 The Session to load when choosing Load Session as the button action 3 The Script file when choosing Load and Start Script as the button action Conditional Button Actions This is a more advanced option The simplest condition is that the Button Action will always be executed In some cases though you want to set special conditions The example below shows a button action that is executed when the session has run for 60 seconds OR the mean level of the EMG amplitude over the last 15 seconds is less than 5 microvolts _ ALWAYS perform this action when user dicks this button Perform action when user cicked AND conditions below are met _ AUTO dick button ONLY when conditions are met button invisible Time Counters _ This screen has been displayed for N seconds The session has run for N seconds N _ TRIAL counter has reache
286. ssssssssececceeceesessso 166 Switching tothe Editor Mode srsula a a 166 The Object Instrument Toolbar esie E een tauaiadaaves 167 Instruments Overview amp PUNCHONS sennu Ei 168 S4 Screen MSUMENO E aa a r a aai 169 InStruments eB abet ap hoera E S 169 Instruments the Single Y Scale Line graph ccccccsssesssseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseseeeees 170 Instruments the Dual Y Scale Line graph seeeesssessseoeerssssssssseeresssssssseeeeee 173 Instruments the Vernier Instrumentsin e takes ernest 174 Instruments the Sincle FFT Spectrum conics tra nderetetiehstesdeiaiei ab tetinieeeier 175 Instruments the Dual FFT Spectrum ecccccccccccceeesseeeeeceeeeeeeaeeenseeeeeees 177 lnstr ments the 3D FFT Spec iii eea qieiadecrertentuetuamaes 178 Instruments the Polygraph Instrument cc cccceccccccccceeeeeseeecceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 180 Instroments ihe Spec roor In sxc cic nect E sia aestcnel sa ender TEE 181 Instruments the Clock Counter Instrument ccccccssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 182 Instruments the Water Effect Instrument cccccccecccesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeees 183 Instruments the Numerical Instrument cc eeccccccecccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeees 185 Instruments the DirectX Plug in Instrument cc ccccssseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 188 The Mandala Piic In SCtunossaiicnccsssese anita a N 189 Instruments the Zoomer INstruMent cc ceeeseeecceccccceeeeee
287. statistic s on 2 channel s A Theta amplitude Segment Trend statistics were based on lt Entire Session gt segment SalDev Mean Date Time 2006 7 14 16h59 3 83 Trend Progress Report 3 55 0 00 3 0 00 10 82 10 95 Is Press the Print button on the left top to print the trend report on your default printer BioTrace Software for NeXus 10 Screen lt gt The Close button will cancel the printing V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 84 4 6 Sensor Configuration Sessions consist of sets of data files that contain physiological data and other types of files such as video sound marker information and textual information The physiological signals are contained by Channels In chapter 3 2 you could already read an introduction on them We will now describe the main user interface that deals with sensors and channels BioTrace Sensor Configuration In BioTrace all signals are acquired by and derived from the sensors BioTrace allows you to change channels and sensor configurations The place where you can view and change the sensor configuration is here press the I key on your keyboard Sensor Input and Samplerate configuration Select a SENSOR type for each input Samples per second Input B Input C EMG raw InputD EMG raw Input E 32 SPE NexXus 10 Input F ae Wireless BlueTooth Input G 128 SPS _ Unlock samplerates Input H
288. statistics are considered valid The statistics output 1s NNMin The smallest interbeat interval IBI in ms NNMax The largest IBI NNMean The average IBI SDNN The standard deviation of the IBI table RMSSD The square root of the mean of the sum of differences between Subsequent interbeat intervals NN50 The number of subsequent pairs that differ more than 50 ms pNN50 This number expressed as a percentage of the total VLF Very low frequency power from 0 0033 to 0 04 Hz LF Low frequency power from 0 04 to 0 15 Hz HF High frequency power from 0 15 to 0 4 Hz LF HF Ratio of the LF over the HF LF The percent power of the LF of VLF LF HF HF The percent power of the HF of VLF LF HF BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 122 The IBI table On the right side of the dialog box you see the IBI table This is a text field holding ASCII data that you can select and copy paste to another application Alternatively you can Export the IBI table to a text file which you can import from other applications IBI Artifact Rejection Please note that this IBI table contains NN intervals that are de artifacted by the software in the following ways 1 The software already rejects unlikely IBIs values during the computation of the HR It for instance rejects values that are below 40 beats per minute and over 240 beats per minute It also rejects peaks beats that contain too much EMG noise or have a differenc
289. statistics for the past 15 seconds or the whole session 5 The current state of the reward counter this counter value can be increased by instruments when they are below or above thresholds The reward counter is used for scoring the success of biofeedback guided training BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 144 Instrument Style and other Display Options The instrument style and other display options vary considerably from instrument to instrument We will give one example spectral Analysis of EEG Display Options and Range Settings Y scale RANGE ooo in Range adjustments MANUAL adjustment uto FIT to MIN MAX _ Auto FIT to D MAX Suto CENTER maintain range FFT Frequency range 0 40 Hz FFT Epoch size 2 Sec 0 500 hz bin Show FFT statistics Smoothing Data Type Stats Instrument Style PalyG on gradient v Display options 1 3D Style 1 8 Sec Refresh v Display options 2 Show Magnitude Spectrum v Apply Cancel In the picture above the following special display settings have been chosen for a 3D FFT Spectrum instrument Instrument Style Polygon with a gradient in it Display options 1 3D Style with 8 refresh sweeps per second Display options 2 Magnitude Spectrum instead of power spectrum The instrument style and other display options are ways to fine tune the specifics of how an instrument will display the data
290. sunset0001 jpg sunset0002 jpg etc up to sunset0100 jpg for the last image file A maximum of 9999 images are supported Most animations only need 20 100 images though The animation files are placed in the BioTrace Animations directory in their own subdirectory This subdirectory uses the same alphanumerical text so in this case the full directory would be BioTrace Animations SunSet The file names are not case sensitive An example is shown below File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Badk hy gt E J Search Wey Folders a T sunset0001 jpg T sunset0017 jpq T sunset0033 jpq T sunset0049 jpq T sunset0065 jpg T sunset0002 jpg TE sunset00 18 jpg TE sunset0034 jpg T sunset0050 jpq T sunset0066 jpg T sunset0003 jpg T sunset00 19 jpg T sunset0035 jpg T sunset0051 jpq T sunset006 7 jpg i View as a slide show T sunset0004 jpg TA sunset0020 jpg WE sunset0036 jpg TW sunset0052 jpg T sunset006s jpg Order prints online TW sunset0005 jpg TW sunset0021 jpg T sunset0037 jpa TW sunset0053 jpg T sunset0069 jpg 4 T sunset0006 jpg T sunset0022 jpg T sunset003 jpg T sunset0054 jpg T sunset0070 jpg J T sunset000 jpg T sunset0023 jpg tt sunset0039 jpg T sunset0055 jpq T sunset00 1 jpg T sunset0008 jpg gt sunset00 24 jpg T sunset0040 jpg T sunset0056 jpq T sunset0d 72 jpg T sunset0009 jpg T sunset00 25 jpg T sunset0041 jpa T sunset0057 jpq T sunset00 773 jpg T sunset00 100 jpg T sunset0026
291. t Screen gt gt Select Image Close Select the background FILL option w Color fil Gradient color PF Background color E Border Style Shaded border w Drop shadow enabled BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 202 Selecting an Image file Right click the object and choose Background amp Borders Close This will show the image selection dialog box Select an item fram the list PREVIEW No image gt BYP jpg BY PH eadS ensorSsignal jpg EE GElectrode jpg EEGInputs jpg EGM Trap jog EMG1TARAP EMP EMG Inputs jpg EMGon rrn pq Fractalulial jpq GradientFFT jpq G5A1 jpq G5Az2 jpg Description LAW pg Mandalal jpg Image Alignment Mandel Tiera jpg MM ath0 bmp MiniB rainimap jpg MiniB rainimape jpg N ameb ack jpg Pacman ame g ASP1 jpq SCP Downipg You can select 1 image file from the list on the left and set the following properties 1 Image Alignment this defines how the image will be placed or stretched inside the image object box Default is Fit Image to Box 2 Image Inset when you select Center Image under the Image Alignment property You can choose the Inset This defines how much empty space there will be around the image Adding Images Files to BioTrace You can add your own Image Files to BioTrace by copying them into the Biotrace Images directory Both the BMP and JPG f
292. t is left on the flash card drive This will depend on the capacity of the flash card and the selected sensors If you select the four fast inputs A B C and D at a high sample rate you will have less recording time then when you select channels with lower sample rates inputs E F G H I and J Please note that NeXus will store the physiological data in a compressed fashion and BioTrace will first need to import and extract the session data files from the flash card before you can use it 4 7 Channel Sets and Editing Channels The physiological data channels of BioTrace are organized in channel sets Each set comprises of 80 data channels of which the first 10 in case of NeXus are the sensors Press the C key on your or select the menu option Channel Set Definition from the configuration menu see below to open the channel set 4 Biol race Software for NeXus 10 Scre File Screen Weale Sensor Input configuration T Channel Set definition C MultiMedia DVD Control M The channel set shown here is the default channel set The name of the currently loaded channel set can also been found in the caption of this dialog box The file name of the default channel set is default channels BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 91 Select channels lt Default channels gt SengorAa EEG Sensor B EEG SengorL EMG raw Sensor D EMG raw Senzor E SC GSH Sensor F T emp
293. t recording the new session Depending on how relaxed you are you will probably see skin conductance values between and 10 micro siemens and hand temperature levels between 30 and 36 degrees Celsius Roughly 80 to 97 degrees Fahrenheit Let the system run for a while and observe the signals You will see that when you relax your skin conductance will decrease and most likely your hand temperature will increase Note NeXus has very high 24 bit ADC output on all sensors For temperature this means you can detect changes that are smaller than 0 0001 degrees Celsius 1 10000 degree and for skin conductance it means changes smaller than 0 001 micro siemens In effect this enables you to see micro physiological changes that older 12 14 bit equipment may not even detect anymore You should now see something like this on your screen 3 19 isa Mana ep a o a lt aa wr va wi _ Y a 2 TS I E a ae La a E a Note the example above is shown for signals from Input C D on the NeXus 4 Let s add an EVENT MARKER while we are recording Event markers are used to make notes during a session that you can read back and later view in the session overview screen You can simply do this by hitting the RETURN key and type in your text This action will not interrupt the session recording V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 35 Please enter the text of the session MARKER my F
294. t the computer V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 14 1 5 Step 5 Restart and check Windows XP version In case you are using Windows XP after installation of the software please restart the computer and check which version of Windows XP you have You can do so by opening the control panel You find this under the Windows Start button as shown below Windows XP Home Editio E Control Panel ee Network Connections ta Printers and Faxes Help and Support Taskbar and Start Menu Rum Log Off Mind Media Turn Off Computer In the control panel look for the SYSTEM icon and open it You will then be prompted with the system settings The version of Windows XP is shown and marked in red below In this case it is Service Pack 2 system Properties System Restore Automatic Updates Remote General Computer Name Hardware i Advanced System Microsoft Windows XF Registered to Mind Media 5527 7 OEM 0M 1903 00100 Intel R Pentium R 4 CPU 2 80GHz 2 7 9 GHz 514 MB of RAM Support Information Cancel Note we actually advise to use Windows 7 or a newer version of Windows V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 15 1 6 Step 6 Bluetooth Driver Installation For Windows XP users before you can use the BioTrace software and the NeXus unit the Bluetooth drivers must be i
295. ta channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges Tite Text s Font Settings Feedback Options amp Thresholds V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 54 It is important to understand how inhibits work Think of it as an application wide pausing event Sounds turn off video stops playing until the inhibit goes away Note inhibit states are application wide meaning that a single instrument can turn one or more instruments which are playing audio visual feedback off It does not matter which screen the instruments are on An instrument however can be set to Ignore Inhibit All In that case this specific instrument s biofeedback will not be turned off by the inhibit state Tip when the application wide inhibit state has been set the background of the time display will temporary be shown in a darker color See example below Record Digital and Analog types of biofeedback Another concept is the concept of digital feedback threshold based and analog continuous feedback Digital feedback is always an On Off situation where for instance a tone is played or switched off The mhibit state 1s an example of this Example 1 when the Alpha level in the EEG gets above a threshold of for instance 20 microvolts a soft musical sound is played otherwise the sound is off Example 2 when the Theta l
296. ta type and statistics type 4 Change the Y scale range settings 5 Change the threshold settings 1700 0 l Ta x Select channel s agod Display Type Data Type Statistics P Scale range values 400 Smoothing Threshold Ay Anan Option 1 Select channels With this option you can add more channels to the one currently shown on the current y scale This way you can for instance choose to combine two or more EMG graphs on the same Y scale Each graph will be shown using the default color that has been defined for the channel in the channel editor Tip use this option only to combine channels that are in the same y range Overlapping skin temperature and skin conductance will not work very well since these have different y ranges Combining Alpha and Beta EEG activity on the other hand would work fine Note this option works only on the line graphs display type Option 2 Display Type Linegraph with markers Bargraph 2D w Bargraph 3D With this option you select the graphical way the data is displayed You can choose from line graphs default a line graph with marker points or bar graphs BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 108 Option 3 Data Type With this option you select how the data is processed before it is displayed Show RAW data samples Show 5 second statistics w Show 10 second statistics Show 30 second statistics Show 1 minute statistics othe
297. that you upgrade your computer to Windows XP service pack 2 or newer We cannot support any other configuration with surety In case this is not possible and your computer has XP with SP1 or Windows 2000 with SP4 or newer you need to install Bluetooth with the old Bluetooth drivers A copy of these is located on the BioTrace setup CD They can ONLY be used for the MSI Bluetooth dongle 1 Please open the directory BioTrace BlueTooth Win2000_WinXPSP1 on your hard disk C or D or the drive where you installed the BioTrace Software 2 Start the SETUP EXE application located in that directory After doing this you will see the following Dialog Box InstallShield Wizard Preparing to Install MS Bluetooth Software Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the program setup process Please wait Checking Operating System Version C x 4 hy Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for MSI F Ka Bluetooth Software 1 3 1 E The InstallShield P Wizard will install MSI Bluetooth Software T m on your computer To continue click Next K WORKING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Back Cancel BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page D247 Now press NEXT and follow the instructions iz MSI Bluetooth Software 1 3 1 InstallShield Wizard X J 1 w lt License Agreement be ne Se Pleas
298. the EMG level is below threshold the reward counter will now be incremented by one Displaying the reward counter In this example shown above 1 single bar graph incrementing the reward counter below threshold we will use a numerical instrument to display the counter Note that we could also use another bargraph or Vernier instrument to display this counter value BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 224 Place a numerical instrument at the bottom of the Bargraph by clicking in the Toolbar on the Numerical Instrument and then clicking somewhere below the bargraph instrument The software will now ask you to connect the numerical instrument to a channel Choose channel 36 EMGI1 Amplitude again Size the instrument so it fits nicely below the bargraph and right click the numerical instrument Then choose Display Option amp Ranges Connect to data channel Edit data channel Link to Instrument Color Settings Background amp Borders Display Options amp Ranges We can now change what the numerical instrument displays from the actual value of the data channel to the reward counter Change the setting of the Data Type Stats to the reward counter Smoothing Data TyperStats Current ACTUAL data value Current ACTUAL data value 15 Sec MIM statistic Display options 1 16 Sec MAX statistic l 15 5ec MEAN statistic Display options 15Sec STDDEY statistic
299. the highly sensitive thermistor head is pressed onto the skin and that outside airflow is reduced to a minimum Please take into account that the skin temperature sensor needs about 1 2 minutes to adjust to the temperature of the hand V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 33 Open the screen browser press L on the keyboard select the Basic Screens category and double click on the Temperature and Skin Conductance screen OK let s start the session recording press the RECORD button on the session controls as follows x Exit Menu s j Record This button will now turn red and a dialog box will appear on screen where the software asks you to select a CLIENT This is the dialog box that follows where you select a client Please select a CLIENT for the new session Sample John Let s keep things simple for now and use John Sample as our sample client Click on the Continue button and the next dialog box appears New session recording make sure your system is switched OM and connected to the computer Sistem Ready press START RECORDING to connect START RECORDING Now click in the START RECORDING button to start your first session Make sure the NeXus is ON the green LED should be lit V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 34 The software will search for the NeXus for a few seconds and then star
300. the main features of the BioTrace software These video presentations are an extension of this manual Read Software Manual This will display the PDF software manual BioTrace Help and Instruction Video s Please choose a Video CATEGORY Please select a VIDEO double cick or choose PLAY button 01 Getting Started An overview of the keyboard short cuts _help 02 Instruments Introduction to BioTrace and the main menu help 03 Data Channels and Sensor Inputs Loading a screen by using the L shortcut help 04 Diofeedback Options Recording your first Session with a BVP Sensor _help 05 Session Overview and Analysis Functions Using on the fly screen switching in BioTrace _help O6 Screen Building O7 Computer and Windows XP Configuration 08 BlueTooth Play Selected Video Show Keyboard Shortcuts Brings up the overview of all the keyboard shortcuts You can also press the K key to activate this option Software Live Update Use this function to update your software to the latest version through the Internet BioTrace can only update itself when no sessions are running LiveUpdate will close BioTrace also see chapter 8 5 V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 65 LiveUpdate will now start and check for new updates Biolrace will be closed Continue NO will cancel NeXus User group This will open the NeXus user group web pages In your webbrowser You can join this group a
301. the mean frequency uses a weighted method where each frequency bin is multiplied with the value magnitude or power of that bin If a spectrum would have a normal distribution the Median and Mean frequencies would be identical BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 266 8 0 Advanced Computer Configuration The BioTrace Software uses multi media features such as dual monitor support fast hardware accelerated DirectX graphics digitized sound and real time video capture In this chapter we describe how you can configure your computer so it will optimally support these features 8 1 Dual Monitor Functions and your Graphics Card BioTrace offers full support for a dual monitor setup on a single computer That means that each monitor will display its own independent screen Before you can use this function you need to set up your dual monitor configuration in Windows XP by going to the display properties right click somewhere on your desktop and select properties then select the TAB called Settings The following dialog box will be shown actual screen display may vary Display Properties Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors 2 Display 2 Plug and Play Monitor on NVIDIA GeForce Fx 5200 Screen resolution Color quality Less More Highest 32 bit v 1280 by 1024 pixels ii EE EE Hi Use this device as the pri
302. tion of those buttons Button based hyperlinked protocols Summary Buttons are objects that you can place on a screen and can do something when you click in them such as load another screen This is called hyperlinking jumping to a screen Using buttons is a simple and effective way to create a protocol However each step in the protocol needs a button and you must make sure it loads the right screen Advantages you can place as many buttons as you wish on a screen and jump from that screen to a number of other screens That way such a screen could serve as a menu You can make the link to the other screens conditional For instance you only hyperlink jump to the other screen when the screen slide has been shown for at least 10 seconds or the EMG level is below 2 microvolts Disadvantages tis rather laborious and requires each button action to be programmed Removing one screen slide from the button linked sequence will break the sequence Itis harder to program loops of screens In the protocol example you can see that a combination of hyperlinked button based and sequence based screens are used BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 236 Sequence Script based_protocols Screens that are put in a script are always played in a fixed sequence You launch a script by clicking in a button which has a button action set to Launch a SCRIPT You can find this definition in
303. tton action will step one screen back in the sequence 6 Next gt gt in script when a protocol screen sequence script has been loaded this button action will advance to the next screen in the sequence 7 Hyperlink this button action jump to load a next screen 8 Exit the Application this will end the BioTrace application 9 Show Session Overview this will switch to the session overview screen mode same as pressing the Tab Key on your keyboard 10 Load and Start Script this button action will load a sequence script and load and show the first screen of this sequence Sequence Scripts are always started by use of a button action 11 Select Client and Session this button action will open up the client session database dialog box so the user can select and load a session 12 Load Session same as above 13 Build NEW screen this will clear the current screen and enter the screen editor mode 14 Select a screen this button action will open up the screen browser so the user can select and load a new screen 15 Select a screen and record this button action will open up the screen browser where the user can select and load a new screen Immediately after that it will start the recording mode ask for a client and start a new session 16 Load and Play Video this button action will load and play a video file Note you can select more than 1 button action to a button For instance you could combine the Record Se
304. ty _ Use DATA director Test Mrs Date Desa 15 06 2004 Sampl 15 06 2004 2xEMi Then click the Generate TREND report button Edit Session Notes Delete Session Import FLASH Session Import PC Session Next the software will show you previously generated reports in the following dialog box Select a Trend Report for John Samople Double dick a TREND report file from the listbox below to view amp printit Or choose the Create NEW button to generate a new trend report Select a report and hit the DELETE key to remove a trend report Date Channels Stats Segment 2006 07 14 15h09 A Theta amplitude A SMR amplitude Std Dev Mean 4 Baseline View Selected Report Delete Report Create NEW Report This example shows a single report on the Theta and SMR amplitudes on the Baseline segments in 4 sessions 4 Baseline Every time you generate a report the results will be stored for later review and will be added to this list By clicking in the Create NEW Report you can create add a new report V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 79 What does a Trend Report show A trend report shows the trend or progress of a physiological parameter over a number of sessions For instance it could be used to show the trend of the EMG level during relaxation sessions where the goal is to learn to lower muscle tone By using
305. uetooth Setup Wizard y view My Bluetooth services view devices in range g view or modify configuration Other Places iC Desktop 4 My Computer O Bluetooth Exchange Folder a My Network Places RA Printers and Faxes Details My Bluetooth Places System Folder BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 281 After your NeXus has been found it will be shown as an ICON which you will need to right click once so you can pair the NeXus with the computer See the example below My Bluetooth Places Entire Bluetooth Neighborhood fm x File Edit View Bluetooth Favorites Tools Help Back gt Pa pe Search ia Folders Address E My Bluetooth Places Entire Bluetooth Neighborhood gt Go a Device Name Type ditional Information e Bluetooth Tasks m Personal Computer Personal Computer Bluetooth Setup Wizard Linkami Rmsor 31 Min p Min 2 view My Bluetooth services Explore Pieter mobiel Open Search for devices in range g view or modify configuration Discover Available Services T Establish Pairing Pair Device Discover services laste Display device properties Paste Properties Other Places 3 Desktop My Computer O Bluetooth Exchange Folder My Bluetooth Places wy My Network Places RA Printers and Faxes Details NeXus 10 0928040011 Unknown Major 31 Minor 0 Once the computer has connected to the NeXus you
306. up menu will appear Then select Compute Statistics gt on entire session Select Channels for Overview Event markers segment options Analysis Functions d Recompute Session Overview Artifact Rejection d on all segments Size of TIME axis VUL V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 29 This will compute some basic statistics on the session which will show up in a dialog box Session Statistics Note you can copy paste the statistics below by selecting the text right cicking with the mouse and choosing Copy Session Overview Statistics aver 1 0 Seconds of raw and computed data starting at t 61 Sec Max Mean Vanance SidDev Coef V gt TH1 lt TH 1126 14 1191 70 1136 65 84 24 9 18 0 01 100 00 0 00 Sensor H RSP 6f6f 9254 81 23 25 11 5 01 0 06 0 00 100 00 HR EKG 0 00 of the data was rejected artifacts o There are many more functions that the session overview screen can perform as you will see later on in the manual Let s now look at another demo protocol press the ESCAPE key to return to the main menu Then press START and then DEMO protocols 2 5 SC Temperature example The 2 example is a basic skin conductance demo combined with temperature After the first screen that explains the sensor you will see the following screen Dy Dc Mito Trace Screens avorite ScreemVGSR screen 2 screen Fe Srem Convfigovenn Heb During Stress
307. ve In between and Below you can choose from the same list of biofeedback options ABOVE Threshold 1 Yo feedback yt Required TIME above Midi Tone feedback Midi Song feedback CD Audio feedback BELOW Threshold 2 Required TIME below 1 No feedback means that no action is taken and in the instrument that you are editing biofeedback is switched off for that threshold state 2 Inhibit all feedback means that all feedback audio and visual will be temporarily paused until the inhibit state goes away This goes for all instruments on all screens unless you specified the Ignore Inhibit All for an instrument 3 Midi Tone feedback this option will play a tone a chord or sequence of MIDI tones BioTrace uses DirectX based MIDI instruments which are digitally sampled and generally sound better than standard MIDI tones 4 Midi Song feedback this option will replay a digital MIDI file 5 CD Audio this option will play one or more track on an audio CD 6 Increment Reward Counter this option will increment the reward counter This is a counter reset to O at the start of a session which can be incremented each time a threshold condition has been met Thus it can be used as a form of scoring 7 Digitized Sound this option will play a digital file WAV MP3 or WMA containing sound or music Required TIME above below This defines how long a threshold condition should last before the feedback conditio
308. video instruction which shows an example of the BioTrace Software and Bluetooth driver installation on a Windows XP computer Install BioTrace this will do a complete installation of BioTrace on your computer In case you are using it to update your BioTrace installation it will leave previously stored sessions and the database intact Note however that updating will cause default settings channels sets and screens to be reset to their defaults Click the last options to open websites that contains more information about NeXus 4 NeXus 10 NeXus 16 NeXus 32 BioTrace and other Mind Media products V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 11 1 3 Step 3 Install BioTrace Now follows a step by step description of the SETUP process This will start when you select the option Install the BioTrace Software on your Computer The first dialog box that will appear looks like this Welcome ay Welcome to the Bio Trace Install program This program allows you to install BioTrace on your hard drive tis strongly recommended that before proceeding you ensure that no other Windows programs are running If you do not wish to install BioTrace click Exit now otherwise click Next to continue License License Please read the license agreement below Please read the license agreement below and select I Agree if you agree with its terms and conditions THIS SOFTWARE IS
309. w Screen Load and Start Script Select Client and Session Load Session t Build NEW screen Select a SCREEN j Select a SCREEN and RECORD Load and Play Video Re 2Seneam noc T F E SES510 3 Hyperlinks dick to select SCREEN Note channel values are the statistical wer MEAN of the last 15 seconds Migraine select Input screen Click to select SESSION to load When dicked do the following Create an EVENT marker Enter text Create a new SEGMENT Enter type Click to select SCRIPT _ Increment TRIAL counter by 1 BioTrace Manual V1 1 Mind Media B V 2004 2006 Page 205 The following button actions can be programmed 1 Record new Session this button action has the same effect as pressing the record button in the session controls STOP Replay Li It will ask the user to select a client and then start a new session 2 Replay Session this button action has the same effect as pressing the Replay button It will replay a previously loaded session 3 Stop Session this button action has the same effect as pressing the Stop button When a session is recording it will ask the user if they want to save the session 4 Pause Session this button action has the same effect as pressing the Pause button in the session controls 5 lt lt Back in script when a protocol screen sequence script has been loaded a list of screens to be shown one after the other like as slide show this bu
310. ws operating system User feedback We have taken great care in providing you with a complete and thorough manual However we are always interested in your feedback on how we can improve the manual or enhance the Software You are welcome to send us your suggestions at support mindmedia nl For technical support please always contact your NeXus reseller V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 21 Now follows a list of warnings and disclaimers that are important for you to read before you will use the BioTrace software Disclaimers and warnings e Please read this user manual and the NeXus hardware manual carefully before using BioTrace with NeXus 4 or NeXus 10 e The PC that is running BioTrace must be placed out of the clients reach for safety reasons We advise 2 meters or more Generic PCs and notebook computers are not medical devices and therefore may pose a hazard to you the client or others If safety is a concern we advise to run BioTrace only on a medical grade PC that conforms with EN 60601 1 e The Microsoft Windows operating system is not a medical device Modern computers running Windows although increasingly more powerful every year may fail unexpectedly in terms of hardware electronics and software for various reasons BioTrace Software was designed with state of the art software development tools but it can not be guaranteed that the Computer or the Windows
311. wser LOADING a new screen Select a screen CATEGORY Select a SCREEN from thumbnail image list below Double clicking on a Thumbnail will load the screen Basic Screens EEG Screens EMG screens Favorite Screens Led Glasses Screens Migraine and Headache Multi Modality Screens Respiration and HRV EMG raw amplitude Speco meme en Skin Conductance GSR Skin Temperature Stress Protocol Long Do you want to assign the selected screen to Stress Protocol Short function key F1 test lt EMG 1 channel gt Hand Temperature training 1 Heartrate Pulse HR Respiration Migraine Vasoconstriction Training v Rename Category Add New Category Load as Primary Screen Load as Secondary Screen Save Scree Delete Screen fm An alert box will ask you if you want to assign the screen you just selected to the function key you pressed Confirm it with YES Then press escape to close the screen browser dialog box Now press the F1 key or the function key you selected and your screen should appear instantly Try pressing the other function keys and you will see that BioTrace rapidly switches between those screens If you forget what shortcut function keys you defined simply press the K key again and you will see the list on the right side Through the same short cut dialog box you can use the SAVE and LOAD buttons to create multiple sets of screen shortcuts V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 1
312. you the current Channel set Brings up the Input configuration box with an overview of the sensors and sample rates Enters an event marker The marker is placed at the time you hit enter and then opens up a box where you can type in the text The event marker will show up in the session overview screen Places an automatic marker labeled with a number The will show up in the session overview screen but not ask for text while you are placing it The will Tab back and forth to the session overview screen This key will set the Smoothing factor on the fly of the instrument the mouse is currently over Replay a session with V2011 BioTrace Manual for NeXus 10 NeXus 4 Mind Media B V 2004 2011 Page 60 Ctrl S Ctrl P or P Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl Z Ctrl Key line graph data for instance showing EMG amplitude Move the mouse over the instrument graph and press S with and without shift several times You will see the graph becoming smoother s and rougher S as you press those keys The mouse arrow can be placed anywhere over the instrument In the top left of the window the smoothing factor will be shown In the picture below the smoothing factor is 4 7 Smoot hing factor 4 File Screen Configuration Help EMs1 Amplitude 07114 07 16 07 18 01 20 01 22 01 24 Save the current screen Print the current session overview statistics or analysis data Copy an

User Manual - Music Cognition Lab

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents